dip the bow in honey

heya what's up

mywookness — Sat, 11 May 2019 05:39:25 GMT

So it's been a while since I posted here, huh! I think I set it so that everyone can join now and so if you're a member you can read, so log in, basically. I haven't used this platform in years, I don't think many people do, but I like to keep it as a catalog of my old fanfics of when I was like, 15 years old.

I got out of the kpop fandom at a certain point, probably around 2014-ish, due to some personal stuff and I really just listen to the music that came out when I was still invested. I write (and I draw now! Like I'm a pretty decent artist! Who would have thought?!) mainly now for other fandoms, specifically Fate/ and its' spin-offs. If that interests you, my ao3 is @poludeuces. I will say that my writing has improved so much, like I would blow my 15 year old to shame.

If you wanna hear the ramblings of someone who loves Alexandre Dumas out of all people way too much, my tumblr is @musketeersmasquerade and twitter is @musketeermasque.

I still really do love SNSD, I love Ryeowook, I think I fell even more for 2AM now that I'm older. I love Epik High, I think that's the group that has stayed with me the most as I've grown up.

I've graduated with my Bachelors in Environmental Geoscience, I can be a geologist in Ontario now. I'm dating a lovely girl and an amazing non-binary partner. I'm extremely happy and blessed.

But there's one big change:

I realized not soon after I stopped writing here that Jules, or Je, isn't me. I realized why I use Jules instead of my real name, which is distinctly feminine. I'm a trans man. I used fanfics to help make that realization and I'm so thankful for that. I think there is certainly some of that in my fics, as I read them back, but it also makes it... uncomfortable for me to come back here sometimes because it's so distinctly linked to when I was a girl. I've come out, I'm over two years on testosterone now, I'm in the process of getting top surgery, I'm getting better.

This time here really helped when I was trying to develop a personality and also come to realization that I a) liked girls and b) may actually be a guy. I hope I can reconnect with some of you again, especially my friends, if they see this somehow.

I'm going to keep this up, and you can read them, honestly I probably wouldn't even care if people stole them now lol. I don't think I'd be able to like write fanfics without doing more research honestly, I haven't been following their lives mostly just listening to music, and I don't know much about the new fangled groups lmao.

Anyways, to keep this short, thanks, I love you, and I hope to be able to reconnect with some of you, not as Jules, but as Alistair.

- mod

masterlist

mywookness — Sun, 28 Apr 2013 03:43:30 GMT

the list of masters. not finished yet

(hint: join the community to read)

SUPER JUNIOR ♕

insomnia, kyuhyun/ryeowook; pg-13 & fluffy: Kyuhyun and Ryeowook share a bed during Super Junior M, but Wookie can't sleep afterwards.

see you there, yesung/han geng; g & fluffy: Jongwoon's parents take him on vacation to China - but the Korean boy hates it there. All up until he finds out about Han Geng.
& Epilogue

hyukjae and donghae, eunhyuk/donghae; pg & fairytale!au: Twins Donghae and Hyukjae are inseparable, which drives their mother insane. So why not leave them in the woods?

the princess and the turtle, yesung/ryeowook; pg & fairytale!au: Ryeowook is the prettiest princess of all - but sometimes she has to do a lot of weird things for love.

fail cockblock, various pairings; pg-13 & crack: Eunhyuk tries to get Yesung the cock-block off. Doesn't work too well for Haehyuk.

holding time in my hands, eunhyuk/heechul; pg & fluff: Heechul-Hyung, after the concert in Beijing, needs some up-lifting, which means some Eunhyuk. Who just happens to have had a major crush on him.

angel of music, yesung/heechul; nc-17 & smut (bad language, smut!): Heechul is completely turned on when Yesung stars in 'Phantom of the Opera'.

cursed by the riverbed, yesung/kyuhyun; pg-13 & angst (character death!): Kyuhyun knows when people die - and meets Jongwoon, who's supposed to die in twenty-six hours.

under the lights, siwon/heechul/zhou mi; nc-17 & smut (smut and girl!heechul): Start | SiChul | WonMi | WonMiChul>

it ain't happening, yesung/kyuhyun; r & humour (bad language and hints of smut): Kyuhyun is horny and decides that fucking Yesung wouldn't be that bad.

bedtime stories, yesung/kangin, heechul/han geng; pg-13 & kid!suju (part of kid-kpop series): Youngwoon tries to give his son, Heechul, a good bedtime story, but it turns for the worst, while Jongwoon fuses over Ryeowook.

clothes that seem to slip down for a reason, yesung/kangin; nc-17 & smut (smut and bad language): Yesung doesn't like it when Kangin doesn't wear proper clothes.

confession, henry/ryeowook; pg-13 & fluff: Henry joins Super Junior - M, Ryeowook becomes his bestie.

a trip to the hairdresser, kyuhyun/ryeowook; pg-13 & fluff: Kyuhyun is taken to the hair dresser - ran by Jung Jaejoong.

the third kim child, yesung/kangin, han geng/heechul; pg-13 & fluff: In which Heechul feels jealous - and therefore gets a new sibling for the Kim family.

eleusinian, yesung/ryeowook; pg-13 & angst: And jongwoon keeps working, hoping to find the cure to the thing that keeps him helpless and cold at night, emotionless to this mystery orchestrated by the gods.
& other parts (written by other authors) :HenBer: dystopic heaven | QMi: utopia | HenBer/QMi: paradise SiHanChul: hell

cursed by arrivals, zhou mi/henry; pg-13 & angst (character death!): Henry knows what kills people by a simple touch. He leaves for Taiwan to loose any ties he's made in Canada. But Zhou Mi loves to touch.

my man, eunhyuk/heechul; pg-13 & romance: Because I had kissed you so many times, I had been with you for so long that the days went away and the hours mingled into years of constant pleasure and smiles. Those years that I fell for.

make me smile, siwon/heechul; g & fluff: Heechul forgets his lunchbox.

forever, siwon/heechul; pg & fluff: There are a few things in this world that make Siwon smile - and Heechul is on the top of his list.

hot coco with sprinkles of love, kyuhyun/ryeowook; pg & fluff: Ryeowook likes making Kyuhyun some hot coco, but Kyuhyun always makes a mess.

hbd sungmin, sungmin-centric; pg-13 & fluff: On their birthdays, the members of DBSJ turn into babies. Sungmin, unfortunately, is too adorable.

you, me, broom closet - now, siwon/zhou mi; nc-17 & smut (smut and bad language!): The silent whispers shared can turned into a hot encounter in a broom closet.

thank you, eunhyuk/sungmin; pg-13 & romance (bad language!): Eunhyuk and Sungmin's rookie days.

winter rose, siwon/kibum; pg & romance: Kibum is his winter rose. His snow beauty.

hbd kangin, shindong/kangin/yesung; pg & fluff: On their birthdays, the members of DBSJ turn into babies. Unfortunately, Shindong and Yesung are left alone to get care of baby Kangin.

darling, kyuhyun/zhou mi; pg-13 & tuck everlasting!au: They search for the pool of immortality

himeros, henry/sungmin; pg-13 & fluff: how they came to be

to give a card, donghae/ryeowook; pg & fluff (kid-kpop): The only problem with Donghae's confession is that he isn't a girl.

hbd siwon and han geng, siwon/han geng/heechul; pg & fluff: On their birthdays, the members of DBSJ turn into babies. Unfortunately, Heechul demands to see baby Hankyung and baby Siwon.

hbd kyuhyun, kyuhyun/zhou mi; pg & fluff: On their birthdays, the members of DBSJ turn into babies. Unfortunately, Zhou Mi likes Kyuhyun to much (or is that a good thing?)

five things sungmin likes about lee donghae, donghae/sungmin; g & fluff: The five things that Sungmin loves about Lee Donghae.

it'll be ok, ryeowook/kyuyun; pg-13 & vampire!au: They just sit at the beach, the rocks sliding under their feet.

monochromantic, yesung/kyuhyun/ryeowook; pg-13 & fluff: Ryeowook, Kyuhyun and Yesung watch dramas together. One person falls asleep.

can't deny, yesung/kyuhyun; pg-13 & gang!au: Kyuhyun just can't deny his supplier Yesung.

memory, yesung/kyuhyun; pg & fluff: Kyuhyun forgets to pick Yesung up.

like a dude, yesung/kyuhyun; nc-17 & smut (sex and genderswitch): Yesung and Kyuhyun - do it like a dude.

hot coffee, yesung/kyuhyun; pg-13 & humour: Yesung gets hot coffee thrown at him from your lovely barista Kyuhyun.

love letter, ryeowook/kibum; pg-13 & high school!au: I knew that it was a bad idea to write a love letter.

hbd eunhyuk, eunhyuk-centic; pg & fluff: On their birthdays, the members of Super Junior turn into babies. Unfortunately, Eunhyuk can do things other's can't.

jukebox, kangin/yesung; pg-13 & angst: Youngwoon only likes love songs if Jongwoon sings them.

someday, siwon/han geng/heechul; pg-13 & angst: they both know he needs to go home

skinned, eunhyuk/donghae; pg-13 & angst (character death!): hyukjae wakes donghae up every night

a few more minutes, zhou mi/kyuhyun; pg-13 & fluff: kyuhyun is a teddy bear and hou mi is an icicle

postcards, yesung/kibum; pg-13 & angst: yesung has trouble sleeping nowadays and kibum has trouble forgetting

we'll be alright, han geng/heechul; pg & angst: in order for him to forget, han geng has to leave

original sound tracks (to our love), kyuhyun/sungmin; pg-13 & romance: this is how a nerdy kyuhyun meets a boy named sungmin

morning dew, siwon/han geng; pg-13 & swan princess!au (character death!): prince siwon has everything and han geng has lost everything

crossovers

péng yǒu, henry/amber (f(x); pg-13 & fluff (part of kid-kpop series): Henry has to walk home with the Lee family for the first time ever - and meets up with Amber, the second Lee daughter.

back bone, sungmin/jungshin (cnblue); pg-13 & rockband!au: Sungmin can't stop admiring the bassist, the one who stands on the other side of the stage, but pretends Sungmin isn't even there.

best spaghetti ever, kyuhyun/junhyung (b2st); pg-13 & fluff: Kyuhyun is annoyed about the time that Junhyung comes home at night at.

performance kisses, heechul/yoochun (dbsk/jyj); pg-13 & college!au: Underneath the stage lights, Heechul just looks so fine~!

handling, kyuhyun/changmin (dbsk/jyj); r & smut: Kyuhyun loves the way that Changmin handles him.

remember, yesung/jaejoong (dbsk/jyj); pg & angst (character death!):Jaejoong counts the albums and smiles: he always bragged that he would be more popular than him.

telephone, eeteuk/yunho (dbsk/jyj); g & fluff: The large smile on Yunho's face makes Jungsu forget about the comments that his fellow band mates just called him.

wherever we wanna go, siwon/sooyoung (girl's generation); pg-13 & fluff: He meets her in a library, a girl wearing a Harry Potter t-shirt and a girl with a beautiful smile.

typewriters, eeteuk/taeyeon (girl's generation); pg-13 & angst (depression!): Taeyeon is an author. She's done well with one book and editors are at her door, telling her to write something soon. Except she can't.

useless rims, kyuhyun/sunny (girl's generation); pg-13 & angst: Kyuhyun will always just be the best friend.

when we meet up, kyuhyun/heecheol (ze:a); nc-17 & smut: Whenever Cho Kyuhyun and Jung Heecheol meet up, they watch videos together.

splattered snow, eeteuk/sulli (f(x)); pg-13 & angst: Jungsu and Jinri's love surpasses the lines of immortality.

dolls, siwon/hyoyeon (girl's generation); pg-13 & angst: to siwon, hyoyeon is exactly what he wants, and exactly what he'll never have

this isn't falling, heechul/yoona (girl's generation); r & angst (abuse!): she's dazzling, she's perfect, but why did she run away?

prep time, heechul/g.o (mblaq); pg-13 & romance: heechul will kill the person that stuck him in co-op at his old high school

better than timmies, henry/sooyoung (girl's generation); pg & romance: henry might have found something better than tim hortons

early mornings, henry/amber (f(x)); pg & romance: The clock sounds at 7:30, the beginning of another day for Henri and Amber.

a well-earned slap, zhou mi/jessica (girl's generation); pg & crack: zhou mi really shouldn't be fighting crime

one day, henry/amber (f(x)); pg-13 & angst: Today I climbed our mountain, Josephine. You remember?

beneath the ice cracks, zhou mi/victoria (f(x)); pg-13 & apocalypse!au: this is the end of the world and it is just us

chaptered

over coffee, kibum/ryeowook; pg-13 & romance: Ryeowook is a coffee shop worker used to working a daily shift. Kibum is a drama star. How they meet is fate.
( 1 | 2 | 3 )

coming down swingin', yesung/kyuhyun; r & romance: Jongwoon is your run of the mill, fail police officer. Always being looked down on, he stumbles on Cho Kyuhyun, (yes, the Cho Kyuhyun. You think I'm lying?) and finds himself in a drama-riffic life as it spins out of control. But Kyuhyun is to be married - so what happens next?
( Part One | Part Two | Part Three )

wrong wires, zhou mi/kyuhyun; nc-17 & romance (smut!): The smart Kyuhyun, professional hacker, gets a very interesting case from a co-worker's husband. Plunged into a rollercoaster of wires, swear words and suits borrowed from Kim Junsu, he meets up with Zhou Mi,none other but the sexy man of his dreams that just happens to want to fail his whole operation.
( 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9 )

forgotten irises (ongoing), various pairings; pg-13 & demi-god!au: Ignorant parents, monsters, and a world filled with chaos - stories hidden behind pained eyes.
( Character Profiles | Chapter One | Chapter Two )

still alive (ongoing), donghae/everyone; nc-17 & dark: Donghae is Super Junior's sex slave. He's subjected to creepy fantasies and things he knows is wrong. The fans will never know, though. But what happens when Donghae falls in love with one of his masters?
( Chapter One | Chapter Two

challenges
miracle 100 Super Junior Fic Challenge: /100
kangin miracle challenge: 6/6
50 kyuwook challenge: /50

DONG BANG SHIN KI ♕

the baby sky, yunho/yoochun; pg-13 & angst (post breakup!): Yoochun 'wastes' his time looking up at the sky, wondering who else is looking up at it too.

a trip to the hairdresser, yunho/jaejoong; pg-13 & fluff: Kyuhyun is taken to the hair dresser - ran by Jung Jaejoong.

monster, yoochun/junsu; pg-13 & angst/fluff: Some YooSu prompts to make the world spin round.

soccer planets, junsu/yoochun; pg-13 & high school!au: yoochun deserves to be president but opts for second place

love trolley, yunho/junsu; pg & fluff: junsu runs into yunho's trolley

bffs, yoochun/junsu; pg & fluff: Yoochun and Junsu are BFFs.

lonely hearts, yunho/yoochun; nc-17 & smut (smut!): Lonely hearts enter the same bar. Lonely hearts have sex.

hbd changmin, yunho/jaejoong; pg-13 & fluff: On their birthdays, the members of DBSJ turn into babies. Unfortunately, Yoochun gets sick and leaves Yunho and Jaejoong to get care of baby Minnie.

hbd yunho, yunho/changmin; pg-13 & fluff: On their birthdays, the members of DBSJ turn into babies. Unfortunately, baby Yunho doesn't say much

hbd jaejoong, jaejoong/junsu/yoochun; pg & fluff: On their birthdays, the members of DBSJ turn into babies. Unfortunately, baby Jaejoong is very picky.

simple crush, yunho/junsu; pg-13 & fluff: http://honeystrings.livejournal.com/43894.html

division of the soul, jaejoong/changmin/junsu; pg-13 & angst: jaejoong doesn't know what's reality and what are dreams

anniversary, yoochun/junsu: pg & fluff: junsu is such too into it, it seems

in my dreams, changmin-centric, ot5; pg-13 & angst (post break up!): changmin prefers dreaming than the reality

crossovers

performance kisses, yoochun/heechul (super junior); pg-13 & college!au: Underneath the stage lights, Heechul just looks so fine~!

handling, changmin/kyuhyun (super junior) ; r &; smut: Kyuhyun loves the way that Changmin handles him.

remember, jaejoong/yesung (super junior); pg & angst (character death!):Jaejoong counts the albums and smiles: he always bragged that he would be more popular than him.

telephone, yunho/eeteuk (super junior); g & fluff: The large smile on Yunho's face makes Jungsu forget about the comments that his fellow band mates just called him.

oh hades, yoochun/stephanie (csjh-the grace); pg-13 & greek mythology!au: Yoochun guards hell. Stephanie argues a lot. And Hades likes Junsu's dancing skills.

chaptered

forgotten irises (ongoing), various pairings; pg-13 & demi-god!au: Ignorant parents, monsters, and a world filled with chaos - stories hidden behind pained eyes.
( Character Profiles | Chapter One | Chapter Two )

viva (ongoing), yunho/junsu; pg-13 & romance: Jung Yunho is a rich, polite, perfect man. Kim Jaejoong is his obnoxious, and gay, best friend. Kim Junsu is a sultry, sexy and seductive man, that Yunho meets when Jaejoong brings him to a gay bar. Romance and humour ensues.
(One | Two | Three | Four | Five)

challenges
100 dbsk challenge: /100

GIRL'S GENERATION ♕

steam, hyoyeon/taeyeon; nc-17 & smut (smut!): Hyoyeon suggests they go to a bath house to clean up after practice. Taeyeon is a pervert, though

you'll be my shelter, yoona/taeyeon; pg-13 & fluff: Taeyeon goes on her lunch break and realizes that it's raining.

history textbooks, taeyeon/tiffany; pg & fluff: They are suffering from a disease called 'skinny love'. But that doesn't mind.

vagues, jessica/tiffany; nc-17 & smut (smut!): Jessica goes to a photoshoot and meets a mermaid that looks a lot like Tiffany.

too early, hyoyeon/yoona/sooyoung; pg-13 & fluff: A typical morning for Im Yoona, Kim Hyoyeon and Choi Sooyoung.

dust, jessica/hyoyeon/yoona; pg & angst: Jessica calls Hyoyeon in the middle of the night.

underground, tiffany/yuri; nc-17 & smut (smut, crossdressing!): You're just the bartender that hides behind a different name. One that leaves me with a drug I can't even pronounce.

office hours, sunny/taeyeon; pg-13 & angst (mentions of sex!): Taeyeon and Sunny don't see eye-to-eye until a fateful Friday night.

one blind mouse (and two that can see), yoona/hyoyeon/sooyoung; r & cop!au: Yoona can see when people will die, Hyoyeon can see how, and Sooyoung where. Haunted with this curse and gift, they all end up at the same place, solving the same crime. ( Part One | Part two )

pleasure roll, jessica/tiffany; nc-17 & high school!au (smut!): Jessica Jung is called down to the principal's office.

light up, jessica/sooyoung; r & angst (substance abuse!): jessica don't care anymore

jealous girlfriends, taeyeon/jessica; pg-13 & fluff: someone really doesn't like the taeny that is going on

the same tomorrow, taeyeon-centric; pg-13 & angst (suicidal thoughts!): she knows i will be the same tomorrow

hit and miss, sunny/taeyeon; pg-13 & angst: soonkyu is wise, taeyeon is rash

ain't worth, sunny/yoona; pg-13 & fluff: sunny gets her heart broken, and she realizes she isn't that much different

safehouse, taeyeon/seohyun; pg-13 & angst: it is when she falls for her that snsd breaks

losts and founds, tiffany/sunny; pg & angst: sunny finds tiffany at the side of the road so she must help her

i can write my fears and you can tame them, sooyoung/yuri; pg & fluff: sooyoung makes yuri feel ten times better

tears and pain, jessica/tiffany; pg & hurt-and-comfort: because in the end, tiffany will always be there for her

lip lesson, sunny/seohyun; pg & fluff: seohyun needs help with kissing

crossovers

tiny dancers, hyoyeon/stephanie (csjh-the grace); nc-17 & smut (smut!): Stephanie and Hyoyeon find the answer to winding down after hours of work and practice.

wherever we wanna go, sooyoung/siwon (super junior); pg-13 & fluff: He meets her in a library, a girl wearing a Harry Potter t-shirt and a girl with a beautiful smile.

typewriters, taeyeon/eeteuk (super junior); pg-13 & angst (depression!): Taeyeon is an author. She's done well with one book and editors are at her door, telling her to write something soon. Except she can't.

useless rims, sunny/kyuhyun (super junior); pg-13 & angst: Kyuhyun will always just be the best friend.

dolls, hyoyeon/siwon (super junior); pg-13 & angst: to siwon, hyoyeon is exactly what he wants, and exactly what he';ll never have

this isn't falling, yoona/heechul (super junior); r & angst (abuse!): she's dazzling, she's perfect, but why did she run away?

arrival, tiffany/t.o.p (bigbang); pg & romance: She's all over the world, making a name, I'm at home, hoping she'll be back soon. Hoping she'll be back soon.

bad girl, tiffany/krystal (f(x)); nc-17 & smut (smut!): Krystal is a bad girl, I don't know about Tiffany, though.

coach, hyoyeon/doojoon (b2st); pg & fluff: Doojoon asks Hyoyeon to sing when they meet up on a date.

unnie's friends, tiffany/krystal (f(x)); nc-17 & smut (smut!): Krystal is used to Jessica bringing friends over - but Stephanie is different.

better than timmies, sooyoung/henry (super junior); pg & romance: henry might have found something better than tim hortons

a well-earned slap, jessica/zhou mi (super junior); pg & crack: zhou mi really shouldn't be fighting crime

this world alone, sooyoung/kris (exo-m); pg-13 & slice of life: kris changes dramatically

the little things, hyoyeon/woori (rainbow); pg-13 & fluff: woori is like the rainbow version of herself

ain't it, jessica/jonghyun (shinee); r & slice of life (substance abuse!): jonghyun is an older brother to a saint

splash of hope, seohyun/jinwoon (2am); pg-13 & fluff: joohyun wakes up one morning and finds eight ducklings in her sink

chaptered

ebony eyelashes (on going), yoona/hyoyeon; pg-13 & hunter!au: Hyoyeon is a nerd, but that's okay. She likes being a nerd. But when Im Yoona appears, she kind of messes things up. And she's kind of weird - like, where does she go at lunchtime?
( Part One )

EXO ♕

let's just dance, kai/lay; pg-13 & romance: Lay just gives him this electrifying feeling.

cherry, tao/xiumin; r & smut (pre-smut!): Zi Tao is bored when Minseok appears eating a cherry popsicle.

strawberry, tao/xiumin; nc-17 & smut (sex!): In short, what happens after Tao is bored and Minseok comes in with a popsicle.

chinese translation, kai/chen; pg-13 & fluff: Jongdae wonders why he was put into EXO-M.

lips, kai/d.o; nc-17 & smut (sex!): In which Kyungsoo hates Jongin's power and Jongin loves Kyungsoo's lips.

when your husband doesn't know, lay/d.o; nc-17 & smut (girl!exo): Yuxiang can do something that no other man can do. Period.

crystal blue, exo-m; pg-13 & crack: it's a shocking turn of events when exo-m's plane crashes

oppa, xiumin/tao; nc-17 & smut (smut!): when zi tao leans that minseok wants to be called oppa in bed

something in a dream, chanyeol/sehun; pg-13 & angst: sehun is sure that his life is perfect until chanyeol comes back and he realizes what he misses

cookies and milk, chanyeol/baekhyun; pg-13 & fluff: in which chanyeol and baekhyun fight for the last cookie and sehun is too talkative

ill soul, kris/tao; r & angst: he told me to cut off my hands, so i did

i know i've said it a million times, kai/d.o; nc-17 & smut (girl!d.o): so jongin comes the next night

spread it around, baekhyun/xiumin; nc-17 & smut (handjobs!): minseok whines and baekhyun smiles, watching him from the mirror

heat, suho/baekhyun; nc-17 & smut (sex!): "baekhyun gets off at having his fingers sucked on and a certain member is more than happy to do it

late night cuddle fest, tao/xiumin; pg-13 & romance (mentions of smut!): tao and xiumin like to cuddle

the memory, kris/lu han/lay; pg-13 & angst: he realizes that he can't live with their memory

skilled photograph, tao/kai; r & supernatural!au: For some strange reason, out of all the people that Kai has trained with—he can only remember Tao’s real name. And those determined eyes.

panada ice cream, tao/sehun; pg-13 & fluff: Sehun works at an ice cream parlour slash coffee shop (Joonmyeon has never been able to decide what he wants to call it officially), and Tao is a hotel worker that believes they kill pandas.

(it's been a long time), kris/baekhyun; nc-17 & smut (sex!): kris really, really wants baekhyun, like - now

a bear that can do a lot of tricks, kris/suho; pg-13 & character study: joonmyeon is simple, he is barefooted, but he is smart

could have spread out, too, kai/baekhyun; pg & angst: they should have been, but were never supposed to be

standing in front of my desperate self and praying, xiumin-centric; r & angst (homophobia and character death!): minseok learns what love really is all too late

dispersed, kai/baekhyun; pg-13 & romance: baekhyun is a painter

points, lu han/lay; nc-17 & smut (sex!): everyone knows that lay is ticklish, but luhan wants to know far it goes

(you love me) from behind the curtain, kris/lay; pg-13 & fluff: the four whiners think that kris is too easy on lay, but they don't know why

some like it hot, kai/chanyeol; nc-17 & smut: jongin likes it hot

yours is mine, kai/lu han; pg-13 & romance: what is jongin's is also lu han's

stockings, kris/chanyeol; nc-17 & smut (crossdressing!): one day, chanyeol comes to school wearing a girl's uniform

swap, suho/kai; nc-17 & smut (girl!suho): What goes down when Suho magically turns into a girl.

reschedule, sehun/kai; pg-13 & bromance: kai keeps on ditching sehun and sehun becomes jealous

drifts, xiumin/chen; pg-13 & post-apocalypse!au: they walk in the snow near the train tracks

the healing wind, sehun/lay; pg-13 & post-apocalypse!au: this is how they meet in a torn up continent

a year without rain, suho/d.o; pg-13 & post-apocalypse!au: the story of the farther farm boy and the shaker

the moment you blink, tao/sehun; nc-17 & smut (girl!exo): zitao and sehun have sex with idols watching

work me hard, tao; nc-17 & smut (tentacle porn): tao likes going out to practice wushu

but i'll be close behind, sehun/chen; pg-13 & angst (character death): when jongdae goes, sehun will be close behind

good kitty, sehun/lay; nc-17 & smut (kitty!lay): sehun gets a cat boy named yixing

little spills, chanyeol/d.o; pg & fluff (fem!d.o): chanyeol does kyungsoo's make-up blindfolded

feathers on fire, kris/d.o; pg-13 & angst: kyungsoo is the filler voice, and kris is the face

shine your light on me baby, chanyeol/xiumin; pg-13 & slice-of-life: minseok is an underpaid and overworked nurse - chanyeol is the college kid that brightens her day

crossovers

guitar strings, lay/dara (2NE1); pg-13 & fluff: Dara hires Lay to teach her guitar.

replay, kai/justin bieber; pg-13 & crack: justin bieber has been kidnapped by kai

this world alone, kris/sooyoung (girl's generation); pg-13 & slice of life: kris changes dramatically

i wonder if you hurt like me, d.o/ara (hello venus); pg & angst: kyungsoo knows that ara will never need him

stop doing the things you do, chen/victoria (f(x)); pg & fluff: every time that victoria sees him, she feels like a crazy noona

wish you were here from the beginning, lu han/baro (b1a4); pg-13 & fluff: lu han and sunwoo become pen pals

chaptered

you've lost your mind, various pairings; nc-17 & smut (sex & cat!exo): When Jongin, Minseok, Jongdae, Joonmyun, Baekhyun and Wu Fan are bored, they see an advertisement for a beautiful man named Lu Han - except he isn't a man, he's a 'catboy', a rare breed of man. With Joonmyun as the only sane one, they decide to get some for themselves.
( Chp. One | Chp. Two )

challenges

one-hundred-and-one exo prompt challenge: /101

SHINee ♕

the third kim child, key-centric; pg-13 & fluff: In which Heechul feels jealous - and therefore gets a new sibling for the Kim family.

love note, jonghyun/key; pg-13 & fluff: Kibum tries to confess to his best friend Jonghyun but it doesn't work.

bras in bed, minho/onew; r & slight-smut (girl!shinee!): Eunsook asks why Minjung doesn't wear bras to bed.

neighbours, jonghyun/key; nc-17 & smut (girl!key): Jonghyun has been noticing that his seventeen-year old neighbour has been stepping out in some interesting clothing lately.

icing, jonghyun/key; nc-17 & smut (girl!jonghyun): Junghee and Kibum have sex with chocolate cake.

locker room (or stalker room, minho/key; pg-13 & fluff (girl!shinee): gwiboon stalks the men's change room and well, minjung finds out

subtraction, onew/taemin; nc-17 & angst: onew doesn't need to really think anymore, once key, jonghyun and minho leave

fresh coat, jonghyun/key; nc-17 & slide-of-life (sex!): kibum decides to buy a beach house

staged, jonghyun-centric; nc-17 & dark (murder!): jonghyun loves chaos

those who wake, jonghyun/key; pg & angst: if either of them had looked up, they would have known that they were perfect for each other

does running away mean we're accepted, finally?, onew/key; pg-13 & romance: jinki has always known that kibum wanted to leave

we used to look at the stars and confess our dreams, minho/key; pg-13 & merman!au: Kibum is a tied merman wishing for the earth and exploration and Minho is a fisherman’s son fighting.

crossovers

redheads, onew/junyoung (ze:a); nc-17 & smut (sex!): Onew grows a growing attraction to Moon Junyoung when he sees him with red hair. It goes from there.

concerts, onew/yonghwa (cnblue); pg-13 & fluff: In which Yonghwa and Onew are adorable and Onew wants to have a concert.

ain't it, jonghyun/jessica (girl's generaton); r &slice of life (substance abuse!): jonghyun is an older brother to a saint

chaptered

forgotten irises (ongoing), various pairings; pg-13 & demi-god!au: Ignorant parents, monsters, and a world filled with chaos - stories hidden behind pained eyes.
( Character Profiles | Chapter One | Chapter Two )

challenges
shinee challenge: /25

B2ST ♕

love potions, junhyung/doojoon, hyunseung/dongwoon; pg-13 & harry potter!au: in which seungho, junhyung and dongwoon are bros in the slytherin cave, g.o may have been a girl guide in another life, and everyone suffers from cowardice.

golden, junhyung/kikwang; r & vampire!au: when you are immortal, waiting is easy

a little too far, doojoon/dongwoon; pg-13 & fluff: doojoon rules beast with an iron fist

do they like cookies?, kikwang/hyunseung; pg & fluff: hyunseung really wants him to come back next week

crossovers

on every wall, hyunseung/seungri (bigbang); pg-13 & angst: And you will see my shadow on every wall.

best spaghetti ever, junhyung/kyuhyun (super junior); pg-13 &fluff: Kyuhyun is annoyed about the time that Junhyung comes home at night at.

coach, doojoon/hyoyeon (girl's generation); pg & fluff: Doojoon asks Hyoyeon to sing when they meet up on a date.

roses, dongwoon/hwayoung (t-ara); pg & fluff: dongwoon and hwayoung are put together because they are the youngest

once every two years, hyunseung/hyuna (4minute); pg-13 & romance: hyuna knows that he will disappear for two years, it is in his contract

chaptered

forgotten clusters, various pairings; r & greek mythology!au: Ignorant parents, monsters, and a world filled with chaos - stories hidden behind pained stars.
( Profiles )

challenges
100 beast/big bang challenge: /100

BIGBANG ♕

wow, taeyang/daesung; nc-17 & smut (sex!): Taeyang wants Daesung tied up to the wall in his basement.

attacks, t.o.p/taeyang; pg-13 & slice-of-life: all youngbae has ever wanted to do is dance

won't you see me go, t.o.p/seungri; nc-17 & smut (girl!seungri): she's a beast, she's an animal

we can strike, t.o.p/daesung; pg-13 & greek mythology!au: he isn't the god of death - how could the god of death be brother to him?

fall back on, daesung/g-dragon; pg-13 & hurt-and-comfort: not that many people know how close they are

words, g-dragon-centric; pg-13 & hurt-and-comfort: mr.kwon has never wanted his son to be an idol star

two words: classy and fabulous, g-dragon + t.o.p, pg-13 & bromance: g-dragon and top get mani-pedis

crossovers

arrival, t.o.p/tiffany (girl's generation); pg & romance: She's all over the world, making a name, I'm at home, hoping she'll be back soon. Hoping she'll be back soon.

on every wall, seungri/hyunseung (b2st); pg-13 & angst: And you will see my shadow on every wall.

he hurts, daesung/minzy (2ne1); pg-13 & angst: daesung knows that he's a monster

innocence's suicide, t.o.p/bom (2ne1); r & greek mythology!au: he strives to find his opposite, and when he finds her - she changes, she dies, like they all do

chaptered

forgotten clusters, various pairings; r & greek mythology!au: Ignorant parents, monsters, and a world filled with chaos - stories hidden behind pained stars.
( Profiles )

challenges
100 beast/big bang challenge: /100

F(X) ♕

birthday girl, krystal/amber; nc-17 & smut (sex!): for her first birthday as a lady, amber eats krystal out

traffic, krystal/amber; nc-17 & slice-of-life (hinted smut!): krystal meets her at the club and realizes that she's rather unforgettable

swept away by our waves, victoria/sulli; pg-13 & fluff: they can barely fit in there together, but they are used to it by now

crossovers

shush, amber/hyuna (4minute); pg-13 & angst (self-harm!): hyuna does not deal with the break-up well

péng yǒu, amber/henry (super junior); pg-13 & fluff (part of kid-kpop series): Henry has to walk home with the Lee family for the first time ever - and meets up with Amber, the second Lee daughter.

early mornings, amber/henry (super junior); pg & romance: The clock sounds at 7:30, the beginning of another day for Henri and Amber.

bad girl, krystal/tiffany (girl's generation); nc-17 & smut (smut!): Krystal is a bad girl, I don't know about Tiffany, though.

unnie's friends, krystal/tiffany (girl's generation); nc-17 & smut (smut!): Krystal is used to Jessica bringing friends over - but Stephanie is different.

one day, amber/henry (super junior); pg-13 & angst: Today I climbed our mountain, Josephine. You remember?

splattered snow, sulli/eeteuk (super junior); pg-13 & angst: Jungsu and Jinri's love surpasses the lines of immortality.

beneath the ice cracks, victoria/zhou mi (super junior); pg-13 & apocalypse!au: this is the end of the world and it is just us

stop doing the things you do, victoria/chen (EXO); pg & fluff: every time that victoria sees him, she feels like a crazy noona

HETALIA ♕

quebec, france/canada; pg & fluff: Francis likes going to Quebec City.

power, prussia/n.italy; pg-13 & fluff: Prussia is stalking Austria, as per usual, when he notices a newbie at the house that he just can't remember.

in your arms, germany/canada; pg-13 & angst: Matthew visits Vimy Ridge, just to realize how much he misses him.

baby, america/canada; pg-13 & fluff (mpreg!): Matthew gets pregnant with Alfred's child.

damnsel in distress, america/belarus; pg-13 & fluff : Alfred goes to Ivan's house to make an alliance, but meets up with Natalya.

churchill, british colombia/manitoba; pg-13 & angst: Manitoba doesn't think he's treated like a province anymore - not like's important.

family matters, hong kong/iceland; nc-17 & smut (sex!): They are just best friends, that's what they consider each other, until one fateful morning.

couple shirts, germany/canada; pg & fluff: Germany and Canada purchase couple shirts.

come back, america/england; pg & angst (girl!england): alfred has always been elizabeth's prince charming

GIRL'S DAY ♕

kisses on the forehead, sojin/hyeri; g & fluff: hyeri wakes up in the middle of the night

giggles and kisses, minah/yura; g & fluff: they are really the worst roommates

enough, jihae/yura; pg-13 & fluff: it's when they are both alone, roaming hands and slippery lip

name is sailor minah ot5; pg-13 & sailor moon!au: luna hates being with these five girls

just a dare, jihae/yura, minah/hyeri/sojin; pg-13 & romance: hyeri really likes kisses

honey, jihae/yura; pg-13 & slight-smut: jihae soon realizes that she loves yura's whole, entire body

why don't we measure the coefficient of static between me and you?, minah/sojin; nc-17 & smut (masturbation!): minah has to go to another room when she starts talking about gears

six and seven, minah/hyeri; pg & fluff: hyeri is easily comparable to a puppy

vanilla and chocolate, yura/sojin; pg-13 & fluff: they have a little celebration each month where they go out for ice cream

don’t forget me, sojin/yura; pg & angst: can you please just love me tonight

just a check up and not fail this time

mywookness — Fri, 01 Feb 2013 03:06:32 GMT

If you were here around July then you know what these are. There are polls for feedback. I sometimes actually use it too. Last one got 61 people, and I am really hoping that you spend a few seconds to go through it. I actually use it. I cannot control what ideas come to my head, but if I notice that there aren't that many MBLAQ fans, I won't write as much MBLAQ. Understand?

View Poll: The poll

Any additional comments can either be given in the comments, or you can PM me and I will reply as soon as possible!

insert witty and convincing title

mywookness — Fri, 01 Feb 2013 02:28:21 GMT

So, one year guys.

1 year.
485 yeobos.
495 watchers.
405 entries.
478 tags.
39 different fandoms.
Countless journal style changes.

Tomorrow, or today depending on wherever you are in the world, marks the one year mark of honeystrings. I am actually really surprised to see how much this community has grown in the year, and I am still very much shocked that there are almost 500 members and watchers. Like whoa. And I like every single one of you so much, so much for dealing with all the stuff I put you through, the periods of time where I don't post for a very long time, the laziness which is in every single one of my fics unless I am forced to put in effort. Not only that, but this community was built on two big things 1) love for fics & 2) love for unloved pairings. I wanted to bring this from mywookness to honeystrings and I think I have done it, almost.

Recently I was looking at the countless word documents that I have not finished, and the chaptered fics that I have to finish (Viva, You Lost Your Mind, Forgotten Irises + Clusters) and the requests and I was thinking, why am I even doing this? I have been pushing back so much, it would be so much easier if I just fell off the face of the planet and stuck to scrolling through tumblr. But then when I checked my inbox, and I see at least two people asking to join honeystrings and my heart swells and pushes me forwards.

I have three (I counted) big fics that will be done soon, like in the next week, and Viva will be finished this weekend (I promise!) and that super long MBLAQ fic that I will hopefully finish eventually. So I have been working, I just haven't had the time to really put in anything small onto honeystrings. I have been working hard! Trust me!

i have also been wanting to read a lot of my friend's stuff, like since December, and if you are one of my friends - PATIENCE! I WILL READ YOUR FIC EVENTUALLY! /sobs

So, because this has been a year, I will be doing a routine check again on the next post which should come up by the end of the night.

I hope you enjoyed this year, new and old yeobos, and I hope another great year at honeystrings!

your moddess,

- Jules (Je)

P.S - If you want to contact me easier, contact me at my tumblr (iamstylin). I go on tumblr daily on my phone like seven times a day so if you send me a message, I can reply much faster, since lately I haven't been getting on my computer as much. There is also my less used twitter (@wooknesstwoyoo), too. Following is awesome, too~! I most certainly will follow back!

news

mywookness — Wed, 09 Jan 2013 02:44:03 GMT

won't be writing smuts for a while.

swap {suho/kai}

mywookness — Tue, 08 Jan 2013 02:26:52 GMT

swap
suho/kai
smut ; nc-17
girl!suho, boy/girl sex
written for deferto_neminem for the 2012 SNCJ Secret Santa

“Can you get Joonmyeon up?” Baekhyun asks, pulling Jongin to the side. He looks at the leader and Sehun’s room, the unspoken question resting in their minds. Why wasn’t the leader up already? He was usually up quite early with a bright smile and his heart-warming personality whilst helping the other members get ready also.

Kyungsoo was ready and making breakfast for everyone, Chanyeol was singing (rather loudly) in the shower, and Sehun was slowly shuffling around, finding clothes in piles and rubbing his eyes every few seconds. Jongin had been drying his hair when Baekhyun rudely interrupted him.

“Why me?” Jongin counters, “Why not Kyungsoo?” Kyungsoo glances at them from the kitchen, but promptly turns back to finish making breakfast. Baekhyun sends him a small smile before turning back to the insolent lead dancer.

“Sehun is busy, and you’re the next youngest, that’s why,” Baekhyun answers. Jongin hates his position as almost-maknae for this exact reason, and rolls his eyes for added effect. “Plus, Joonmyeon likes it when you come to him. It’ll be better than Chanyeol waking him up.” Unfortunately, Jongin has to agree with that fact.

“Fine,” Jongin mumbles and pushes Baekhyun out of the way. He walks down the hall to Joonmyeon and Sehun’s shared room and knocks on the door.

No sign of life comes out (no strained ‘what?’ or the sound of footsteps), so instead of doing the nice thing and just knocking again, Jongin turns the doorknob and struts into Joonmyeon’s room. It’s dark and the blinds are drawn, so it’s almost impossible to really see anything, and Jongin squints in the darkness, trying his best to find Joonmyeon. There isn’t a closet so he can’t hide in there, but his bed is empty. Jongin checks behind the door, but doesn’t find anyone hiding behind it.

“Joonmyeon-hyung?” Jongin asks, closing the door behind him so that Joonmyeon cannot escape, turning the lock slowly.

Sehun’s bed is covered with clothes and there are posters hanging on the wall. Jongin assumes that Joonmyeon wouldn’t be even close to that bed because of the state it’s in, so sticks to Joonmyeon’s side of the room. He crawls onto the bed, making sure that there is no one there. “Hyung?” he calls out once more.

This time he hears shuffling. He smirks.

Jongin pops his head down underneath Joonmyeon’s bed, smiling when he sees the face staring back at him, deadly afraid. “Found you.”

Things change dramatically though when he notices something a little bit different about Joonmyeon hyung.

-

They decide that it is the best to just let Joonmyeon stay home that day. Since Baekhyun and Sehun have to be somewhere, and Kyungsoo is afraid to even look at Joonmyeon, Jongin is voluntold to take care of Joonmyeon.

(Chanyeol is always reaching for the leader’s chest, and so Sehun has to drag him out the door before he can do anything damaging.)

When all the other members have left the dorm, Jongin slowly turns to Joonmyeon. Or Junyeon.

It’s the same old Joonmyeon, just shorter, skinnier and obviously prettier. Her hair seems to have grown overnight, too, for it falls down to her shoulders, a beautiful shade of milk chocolate. Her pink lips remain when she pulls her lips into a smile. She is short but her legs are long compared to her torso, and they are milky and white underneath the shorts that Baekhyun has supplied for her. She wears one of Lu Han’s old t-shirts that was left behind (they think that it’s the closest to actually fitting of anything they own) and it slips down one of her arms, revealing the soft skin of her shoulder.

“I know this is really bad, but,” Jongin begins, sitting down beside Junyeon on the couch. It feels awkward, now. He’s close to Joonmyeon—close enough—and they had been getting closer since their trainee days. This is weird, he thinks, really weird. Junyeon raises an eyebrow (her eyes are a dazzling caramel and it makes Jongin stop to think for a second) before tilting her head to the side. She looks a bit like one of the girls from the manhwas he would read, and it’s actually distracting.

“Yes, Jongin-ah?” she asks, running her tongue over her lips, picking up some of the milk from this morning’s breakfast. Thankfully Kyungsoo was able to save most of it when it had accidentally dropped when Jongin dragged Junyeon out of her room to show to the rest of the EXO-K members.

“Can I touch your boobs?”

Junyeon’s eyes widen. “Um, what?”

“Oh I knew it was a dumb question! I’m just gonna go walk away now and I let you do your girly things for the rest of the day. If you’re going out, though, I suggest that you call me so I can be your chaperone and all-” Jongin stammered, rubbing the back of his neck and his cheeks growing red with embarrassment. Damn teenage hormones!

He gets up to leave, trying his best to run away as soon as possible, when a hand brushes his wrist. Junyeon’s hand grasps his hand and Jongin has to look down, into those gorgeous caramel eyes. Junyeon swallows slowly, before moving her grasp up to Jongin’s forearm, bringing his hand down near her chest. “I never told you that you couldn’t,” she says.

Jongin is paralyzed and therefore Junyeon is able to use his arm and press Jongin’s left hand onto the middle of her chest. Jongin chokes and adjusts his hand a little and gives Junyeon’s left breast a small squeeze. It’s a soft, cushiony feeling, and he cannot help himself—he squeezes once more, this time harder.

Junyeon moans, throwing her head back, “Fuck.”

Her cheeks are flustered and her bangs are strewn across her face. Junyeon’s lips are open partially and her tongue sticks out between her lips just a little. Before Jongin really has time to think, he presses his lips against those cherry lips and kisses her rough. Another strangled moan leaves her lips as Jongin places a hand down flat on Junyeon’s thigh, his left hand continuing to fondle Junyeon’s breast.

“Jongin-ah?” Junyeon smiles before kissing his jawline, her eyes half-open and a hand clutching Jongin’s shirt. He stops kissing her so fiercely and slows down, letting his lips rest against her cheek, her neck, her forehead, places that Jongin has wanted to kiss so much.

His hand runs up to pinch at Junyeon’s nipple, his thumb swirling around the soft nub through the thin layer of fabric of Lu Han’s shirt. They never break eye contact and it makes everything even more exciting. His cheeks are red and her lips are swollen.

Jongin sits down on the sofa beside her, his hands moving to her hips and his lips moving to her own. She shifts just slightly, her legs giving Jongin enough to room so that he can move forwards, his nose smelling the smell of the shampoo from this morning’s shower.

“Should we do this?” Junyeon finally asks after what seems like a lifetime since the question was asked. Jongin nods eagerly, teenage hormones in full effect. Junyeon pulls away, looking deep into his eyes and cocking her head. “We are band mates and this is probably against code somewhere…”

Jongin shrugs, “We don’t know when this’ll happen again and man you’re not hyu—noona.” He tries his best to make it sound better than how it sounds in his head, but Junyeon smiles cheerily, leaning in and pressing her lips against his once more.

“Then let’s go.”

There’s the awkward fumbling of Jongin’s tight shirt, but when it’s off, Junyeon’s hands touch the bare, muscled skin with excited fingers. The touch is cool against Jongin’s skin and it’s almost ticklish, but her hands move down to his sweatpants, pushing down on the fabric and pushing it down to his knees, with some help from Jongin, of course.

She kneels, throwing her top off and revealing her two, perfectly shaped breasts. She throws her shirt down to the floor and grabs at Jongin’s sweatpants, helping him out and throwing them onto the hardwood. She sits on her heels, wearing nothing but the shorts that Baekhyun had lent her, that move slowly against her thighs.

She crawls on her hands and knees until she’s completely hovering over Jongin. Junyeon press their lips together, moaning when Jongin’s dark, warm hands cup one of her breasts. He adjusts himself so that his lips can press against her collarbone, licking up the bone and sliding his hands down her hips to mesh together at her back.

They kiss softly. Junyeon’s lips are soft and kissable and he tastes the soft aftertaste of breakfast on her tongue when their tongues slide and mesh together. The couch dips underneath their weight and it’s cramped, his left leg almost falling off the side in the process. The couch’s fabric is slippery and smooth, but not as smooth as the feeling of her skin.

Junyeon sits up, her breasts swaying just a little as she does so. She presses her small palms down on his thighs, her fingers stretching out and touching Jongin’s dick, which has slowly risen from the touches and the kissing. He bucks up, his hands reaching out to touch Junyeon’s hips. She swats them away.

“Gosh, you’re so hard already,” she comments, running her index finger down the length of Jongin’s clothed erection, a vixen-like smirk pressed against her lips. “Have you been thinking about your hyung for a while, Jongin? You just get hard by just a little foreplay.”

Jongin swallows. Her voice has dropped dramatically in the few seconds and it’s so sexy. It’s a gentle purr with the sting and bite of the jaguar. Her eyes shine with lust and she’s a work of art, hanging on the walls of Jongin’s brain.

She leans in, her nipples brushing his collarbones, and kisses his forehead. “Tell me how much you want my pussy, Kim Jongin. How many times you have imagined this those late nights ‘at practice’.” Her eyes sparkle and the smirk on her lips is so damn kissable.

“Please, Junyeon,” he begs, bucking his lips in vain attempt to get some of that much-needed friction. Her fingernails on barely scrape the length of his dick and he bites back a whimper. Junyeon winks when their eyes meet.

“Call me noona,” she whispers, so faint that Jongin almost doesn’t catch it. The way she drags the world out, lets it soak on her lips before she speaks it, makes him even more agitated—wishing to press his lips against her soft ones once more. He wants to hear screams from that tongue and moans from the back of her throat.

“Noona, please.” Jongin can see the faint flicker of want pass her eyes before she tightens up again, like a firm leader, and slips her hand down his underwear, fisting his cock.

Jongin reacts instantly, bucking his hips as high as he possibly can with a girl straddling him. Her small hand moves to the base of his cock, her thumb moving in slow circles around the tip, smearing the pre-cum that has now already soaked his underwear. With slow movements, Junyeon pulls his underwear down to his calves, and grabs his erection with both hands, almost covering the surface area.

“Junyeon-noona,” Jongin croaks and throws his neck back; exposing his darker skin. Junyeon leans in and kisses his Adam’s apple, bringing her lips up to his jawline, her fingernails scraping his cock gently. “You…You’re next.”

Junyeon raises an eyebrow and cocks her head to the side. Jongin pants and looks up at her with half-lidded eyes.

“Come on,” Jongin teases, his fingertips grazing over her hipbone, pulling at the fabric of Junyeon’s shorts and revealing some of the milky white skin. “Let your dongsaeng see.”

Junyeon moves up to her knees, the fabric swishing against the inside of her thighs. She has difficulty taking them off and swats Jongin’s hands away when he tries to help. The leader has always been independent; but she sends him one of her heart-soothing smiles when he finally draws his hands away. Junyeon stands up, her breasts moving just a little bit as she does so, and slips out of her shorts and underwear, tossing them onto the floor.

She’s pale and smooth and Jongin reaches up to touch, feeling the soft skin underneath his fingertips. “Fuck,” he says, moving his fingers down and hooking them. It’s wet and slippery. He rubs his fingers across her folds, moaning when the wetness moves down his fingers and to his wrist. She shudders and takes a step forwards so that Jongin can see it better.

“You’re pretty wet yourself,” Jongin jokes, kissing her thigh. She pants and unravels on top of him, her juices slowly running down her thigh and over her knees. Jongin curiously leans forwards and takes a small lick; his hot tongue against her cold legs.

He holds out her hand and she grabs it. Jongin leads her down onto his stomach, turning her legs so that they open enough. He leans forwards into a crunch position and hugs her torso, kissing her lips slowly. His tongue sneaks in and she moans, her fingers moving up to his upper back, her nails slowly digging into his back.

He presses her down onto the couch, her hair sprawled against the sofa. “You’re so beautiful,” he mumbles before he even thinks, and she laughs. Junyeon slaps his arm.

“Just get in me,” she jokes.

So he does.

Jongin slips his hand down between her legs, pushing his thumb in to open her up just a little bit. His heart pounds at the sudden heat that clenches around his digit. His dick comes next and slowly presses against the opening; his tip surrounding around his tip. Jongin pants and grabs onto the couch on both sides of her head, leaning in to kiss her. When the heat is bearable he presses in further.

She moans into his mouth and slides her tongue into his mouth. Her mouth is raw and bruised and Jongin likes the feeling of it and the knowledge that he did that to her.

He slips back out and opens his eyes so that they can look at each other. The smile comes back and Jongin’s heart almost stops. She nods: ok.

Jongin smirks and grabs onto her hair, pulling her neck up and biting it fiercely. She shrieks; he does it again. When he lets go and her screams have turned to moans he thrusts back in. Her hands find their way around his neck and he’s pulled down to kiss him on the lips once more. Sweat slicks their bodies.

He thrusts in faster and watches as her body changes. She starts thrusting back against his cock and moans out Jongin’s name.

“Noona,” he pants against her lips. Junyeon moans against his.

“Fuck me harder… fuck your noona hard,” Junyeon mumbles. Jongin grabs onto her face hips and fucks her faster and harder. He swears under his breath when Junyeon unravels completely—he’s found her spot.

He readjusts himself so that he can hit that area perfectly every time. Every thrust makes her scream, her fingernails moving down his back and her legs now around his torso with her ankles digging into the small of his back. The couch is slick with their sweat and he likes the small squeak as he moves back and forth. Jongin hits the spot again and again. Junyeon screams again and again.

“Jongin!” she cries and stabs him with her fingernails. Her eyes explode with lust and fulfillment.

He smiles and thrusts even harder, thrusting her through her orgasm. She continues to move, slower now than before, and he too comes seconds later.

Jongin doesn’t crash down onto her; he kisses her belly-button and she squeals, kicking her legs up. There’s a small puddle of her cum on the sofa and he leans down, licking it up before kissing her softly on the lips, his hands finding her breasts and kneading them gently.

“Thank you Jongin-ah,” Junyeon mumbles.

Jongin laughs, “You think I’m done with you, noona?” Shock runs over Junyeon’s face.

He pulls her up so that she’s straddling him once more. Jongin moves her so that she’s on her knees, and moves her up so that she’s right on top of his face. His hands grab her ass and smiles at the squishiness of it all; like a marshmallow, he thinks.

“Stop playing with my ass and eat me out if you’re going to,” Junyeon replies with her snarky attitude. Jongin plans to destroy that.

He moves his neck just a little bit and lifts his tongue up to lick her folds. She shivers. It’s warm and he can smell the strong smell of lust and sex. He draws back and licks up her thighs, collecting anything from before and cleaning her up, moving from thigh to thigh and coating the skin with her saliva.

“Go,” she snarls. Good, Jongin thinks.

Jongin presses his face into the fray and licks up her folds. He brings his hand up to open her up, and dips her tongue in, collecting as much as he possibly can. His hand fondles her clit. Junyeon moans, her hands moving down and slipping through as much of Jongin’s hair as she possibly can. She moves down, so that her ass cheeks brush against his neck.

He moves faster and smiles when Junyeon’s moans echo in his ears. He dips his tongue in and runs his tongue, pressing his tongue flat against the opening. He brings her clit into his mouth. Junyeon screams, closing her eyes and coming again.

He collects as much as he possibly can and licks his lips, smiling at the taste. Some collects at his teeth and stains his tongue. When she draws away he can see the red cheeks and strewn hair and he runs a hand through her hair. She reaches up and wipes some cum from his cheek, slipping it into her mouth and sucking it.

-

Baekhyun gives Jongin a strange look when the group returns home that night. Junyeon has some clothes from the f(x)-sunbaes and it fits loosely just in case he changes back during the night. When the rest of the group goes to sleep Jongin and Junyeon force Sehun to sleep with Kyungsoo that night, and spend the night cuddling, Junyeon’s head on Jongin’s shoulder. Jongin’s hands are around her waist and they draw small circles.

“I can’t wait until you’re a girl,” Junyeon says with a smirk.

--
end.
a/n: thank you for my boyfriend for being a pain and making this fic take too much longer than it should have!
a/n1: jokes aside thank you for all the people that pushed me through this fic!

we used to look at the stars and confess our dreams {minho/key}

mywookness — Tue, 08 Jan 2013 02:15:23 GMT

we used to look at the stars and confess our dreams
minho/key
merman!au ; pg-13
merman!key, merman!taemin, merman!onew, coarse language
written for lucentic for the 2012 SHINee Secret Santa exchange

Once upon a time there was a city that sat near the sea.

There were cliffs that dipped into the ocean and that had eroded from years of the waves attacking its sides. It was bright and sunny days mostly and the rays of the sun licked the wrinkled sea, the light to the darkness of the deep, cold grave below. When it was cold enough whales would appear and when it was warm enough, dolphins would jump out of the sea’s grasp.

On the cliffs sat a small town. It was principally fisherman and their humble wives that lived in this town because of the large amount of fish just a few kilometers offshore. The men’s arms were sunburnt or tanned from the hours on the ships and their hands were knotted and bloodied and scarred from the work with nets and knives all of their lives.

It is one late autumn afternoon, just before the fishermen are about to drive back home to the shore, when an experienced fisherman named Jung Yunho sees something in the distance. He isn’t one-hundred-percent sure what it is, and so drives his boat closer and closer, until he sees something on a rock that juts out of the ocean. At first it looks like a woman sunbathing in the crisp air, but then he realizes that it’s a man with a fish tail.

When the mermen and mermaids are discovered, their sleepy fishing town turns into a buzz. A mayor is changed from a jolly man to a dictator that builds his house on the biggest and the most dangerous cliff so that he can oversee the mermaids and mermen that sheepishly peek their heads out of the sea. Only some brave few have ever gone down to the beach, where the port sits.

The dictator has only seen three: the one that Jung Yunho found and has now at his house as a ‘pet’ of sorts, a curious mermaid, and the King.

The King is old but wise, and his kindness outshines any of his people. And so that’s why the dictator hates him the most; he is the opposite of him. They only meet a few times but even if the King wants to make lasting ties between the sea people and the earth people, but the dictator is far too jealous of the merman, and sends a full attack against the merman people.

Both sides fight valiantly, with many heroes from both sides of the war, but it is finally the humans with their guns and their explosives that destroy the merman people. In the end the humans travel by submarine to the King’s palace and shoot missiles, until it finally crumbles. The Queen dies and in a selfish act of revenge, the King swims up to the shore and attacks the humans with his most powerful weapon—a Trident. He died with seven bullets in his body; his Trident was taken.

The remainders of the mermaids and merman were banned from the shores of the now bloody city. They were to stay one-hundred kilometers away from their shores, and if they did not follow these rules, they would be shot. In response, the first daughter of the King said that they would destroy any ship that would enter their region would be destroyed and the crew drowned.

The royal family led the merman people away. No one knew if they had died eventually, but they remained silent, and soon the idea of half-man, half-fish creatures just became a fable.

-

Minho had never lived a sheltered life.

His father was a fisherman, like many of the other fathers in the small fishing village. Minho prided himself with having a strong, powerful and good-looking father that always came home with energy even after a long day of work. Mr. Choi would often get up early in the morning, way before Minho would even think of getting up, to go fish. Many days he would not return for a week, sometimes two weeks, and come home with a boatload full of fish and a cold. But Mr. Choi’s smile never left his face.

One morning, Mr. Choi leaves for the ships, like any other day, hours before Minho gets up and gets ready to go to school. Kim Jonghyun, a boy that goes to the same school as him, stops by his house and they walk together to school.

Jonghyun’s father also works a fisherman, and Minho has seen Mr. Kim many times at their house after a long fishing trip. Compared to his father, Mr. Kim looks tired and old, with bags under his eyes and wrinkles on his face. Jonghyun likes to comment about all the scars that his father has, but Minho finds it just gross and ugly.

“How long do you think this trip will be?” Minho asks when they’re just a few steps away from the school. He always asks this question whenever his father disappears, because Jonghyun knows everything because he’s a year older and his father tells him everything. Jonghyun stops and looks up at the sky before nodding.

“Three days! I heard that some guy is retiring, so they won’t be out for that long,” Jonghyun explains. He shrugs at Minho’s smile before running into the school’s gates. Minho runs after him. He stops at the gates.

It’s said that the town made these gates when the great war was finished. The school was the infirmary during the war, and so it was the only off-limits area in the town. The crest on the gates is of two narwhals crossed—the symbol of the city since the beginning. There was a rumor that when the humans were almost defeated and the mermaids had almost reached the shore, that a bunch of the sea creatures pushed the mermaids and mermen away. They were led by the city’s symbol—the narwhal.

It’s these gates that Minho always stops and stares at every morning. He remembers the first day of year one when his father carried him on his shoulders up to these gates. This is where Mr. Choi went to school, and his father went to this school too, and this is when his mommy and his daddy met each other. His father only got a high school education—that was why Minho was going to stay in school for as long as he possibly could so that he could get a better life.

His father always looks up to these gates. There’s a reason—all the roads lead to the school; they always have. And even when the dirt roads turned to asphalt and feet turned to wheels, all the roads lead to the school. Everything pointed to the school, the center of it all.

-

When Minho returns from school three days later he sees his mother crying. His mother doesn’t cry though. Nine-year Minho is sure of this. The only time he saw his mother cry was when he was really little and she had locked herself in her room.

It’s different this time. She’s out in the open and vulnerable.

Minho runs over to her, resting his hands on her shoulders, his stomach on her back and his chin near her cheeks. “What’s wrong ma? What’s wrong?” She cries harder. Her body shakes uncontrollably even if Minho tries to keep her still. He feels useless.

His grandmother arrives at six and scoops Minho and puts him to bed. He’s told that he doesn’t have to go to school tomorrow.

-

Nine years later

Minho is on a fishing boat. It’s something that he’s been doing since he was sixteen, when he dropped out of school.

Jonghyun still looks down at him when they cross the street because of this. Jonghyun is now the main librarian in the city because he had gone to school for the all four years of school. They rarely talk anymore but Minho wouldn’t want to talk to him anyways. Jonghyun has always had it better than Minho. Jonghyun didn’t have to make any rash decisions in his life; Minho makes them every day.

When Minho is nine years old, he learns that his father and most of their ship were brutally murdered. Jonghyun’s father was the only one that survived—he stabbed and fought himself free before he could be dragged to the depths. When Jonghyun’s father returned home the first home he went to was Minho’s.

Everyone shook their heads with disappointment when they heard the story. People didn’t need to ask the cause of their deaths; it was obvious to anyone that knew some brief history on their city would know that it was the mermaids. They must have forgotten about the boundaries or maybe the fish lead them across the line. The mermen guards must have seen the boat, counted to ten, and started attacking them.

There were gifts and flowers and hugs for the next few months. People asked if he was ok and gave out their help and their hands but Minho never accepted them. He just smiled politely and told them matter-of-factly that they’ll be fine, and that they shouldn’t worry. Two weeks after Mr. Choi’s death, his mother starts working full-time at the fishing plant the next town over. She returns home every night with bags underneath her eyes.

Minho hates to see this look in her eyes every night—he hates how she has to go to sleep right when she gets home. He tries doing a lot of the chores and he tries making dinner so that she won’t have that many problems but in the end, he just feels useless. He promises her that when he’s sixteen, he’ll drop out of school and start working to get them more revenue, until his mother can retire.

His mother and his heart are against this decision, but he knows that it had to be done. If it wasn’t done she would be working herself to the bone. He wants to go through all of high school and get a higher paying job but he tells himself that he cannot spend another night feeling useless.

Minho has never lived a sheltered life. He knows ships from his father and in a couple days he understands the layout of the fishing boats. He doesn’t interact well with the older fishing men but they don’t try to make a conversation with him either; he works. He is the one that takes the long trips because he doesn’t want to, nor does he need to, go home for a very long time. After nine years his mother is finally getting better.

He believes work is the best way to push away the evil thoughts that dare to creep in and invade his thoughts. There are mornings where the last thing he wants to do is get up, but he knows he has no other choice. If he leaves for four days he doesn’t think about his family or friends for four days. But when he settles in his bed at home after the four days and tries to sleep, his mother’s cooking in his belly, his father’s laugh and his mother’s eye-smile creep in and he cannot sleep.

He works ten times harder.

-

It’s a five day trip and Minho smells the sea air and lets it circulate in his lungs. He spreads out his arms. It smells of salt, of the sea and of fish, and this is the smell that clings to him. They are on their way home now and Minho can almost feel the warmth of his mother’s arms when she’ll hug him.

“Have you seen them?” one of the seniors, Kim Youngwoon asks, a cigarette between his lips and a cut running down to his chin. Minho nods; he doesn’t need to ask what ‘them’ is. Not that many people call them by their full names anymore. It’s ‘them’ or ‘the creatures’. They don’t deserve a pretty name; they don’t deserve to be called man.

“There have been more,” Minho comments. He knows how to be blunt and quick now.

“I think something’s coming,” Youngwoon predicts, rubbing his chin. He must have shaved it before the trip but now it grows back slowly, and Minho can hear the distinct sound of his thumb moving against the short hairs. “Maybe even a new war.” Minho’s eyes open and Youngwoon nods.

“A war is a bit drastic, isn’t it?” Minho asks.

“Humanity is drastic,” Youngwoon replies, throwing his cigarette onto the ground and smashing it with his rubber boots. “Just remember—if you see one, kill one.” Minho nods and Youngwoon turns around, his hands in his pockets. The wind blows his hair around.

-

“What in the world are you thinking?” Taemin asks and checks his nails. He lies down on the sand and stretches out his arms and his tail so that his fins at the bottom stretch out before shrinking back in when he settles back down. His scales shine golden yellow and match his current brown locks. With a face like Adonis and dancing as graceful as a swan’s, Taemin was chased by many mermaids. The only thing they didn’t know was that he’s a brat.

Kibum knows this all too well.

“A lot more than you,” Kibum replies, swimming around the sunken ship that he now has claimed his secret hiding spot. Well, not so secret after the golden-tailed merman had followed him one day (undoubtedly the worst day of his life). Besides the pesky Taemin going there whenever Kibum wants some time to himself, it’s wonderful and filled with secrets that once upon a time, Kibum had been able to keep to himself. Not anymore.

“Hey! That’s mean your highness,” Taemin complains, “You shouldn’t be using such a foul tongue to your subjects.” He flips his chestnut hair so that it falls softly down on his cheek like the seaweed that blows back and forth with the soft current.

“And my subjects shouldn’t follow me around everywhere, but you got that one covered.” Kibum swims into the hull of the ship and pulls out one of his most prized items—a compass that he had found in the debris. Or that’s what Jinki told him it was when he had asked him what it was. It doesn’t work anymore because of the amount of time spent underwater but he doesn’t mind, spending his hours looking at the dials and the needle that will always point at southwest.

He returns out to where Taemin is impatiently waiting. Though he pretends like he doesn’t mind being so far away from the big city, it’s obvious that he does by the way he fidgets and swims about whenever he follows Kibum to his favourite hiding spot. A city boy through and through, it showed by the way he turned his head back, half-expecting a bunch of guards to arrive. Kibum already knows they won’t, this place is so far away from the castle it takes thirty minutes to swim out here, and Woohyun, the head of the guards, would never force them to go looking for him.

“Can we go home now?” Taemin drawls, running his fingers through his hair and letting it swim around his head. He kicks his tail and a little bit of sand moves up. “Maybe you just need to rest a little while and realize what you’re thinking of doing is completely and utterly foolish and that staying home is probably the best.”

Kibum sighs. Some people would never understand.

“It is land, an area that us merman have never been able to reach in centuries! If you don’t find the idea of exploring and leaving this dull, desolate place behind then you must be mad! Taemin, I doubt you’ll ever understand the wonderfulness of the outside world,” Kibum explains. Taemin rolls his eyes.

“You’re the mad one, Prince Kibum! You’ve got everything and yet you want more? You have so many friends and attendants and you are the only son of the Queen! That makes you the only heir! What happens if you get killed on land because you are a damn merman, by the way, and someone else who isn’t as awesome as you will take your place? You have to think of these things.” Taemin huffs and pulls at Kibum’s hand, pulling him home. Kibum sighs and sets down his belongings and follows Taemin back home, who seems much happier to be closer to the city.

“One day,” Kibum whispers under his breath when he reaches the castle gates. Woohyun shakes his head when Taemin knocks on the large, stone doors, and Kibum and he share a small smile. Woohyun will keep his secret. It’s nice to have people who think alike.

-

This idea stemmed in him when he was young. He heard learned of the large war that separated them from the humans and was told to hate them, and so for a very long time he despised the humans and wished to stay in his room and only go out when he needed to. Kibum was a prince though and was pulled out to talk to other kids and his mother’s friends. Everyone would always smile down at him—he was a promising future.

He was the first son in a very long time. After the Queen had ran away at the end of the war, she had had a daughter, and then her daughter had a daughter, and the cycle continued for two more generations until Kibum was born. Everyone saw this a sign, and so they watched him ever-so closely to make sure that he wasn’t turning evil or that he was doing any wrong things. He would be a strong leader.

He had many friends that he became close with at a very young age. His first friend was the scholar’s son, Lee Jinki, who had a pretty, pale green tale and messy, brown hair. He giggled often and was extremely clumsy, but he was always really knowledgeable about the humans and their customs from what his father told him. Jinki was the one that knew Kibum’s obsession with going further in the most, and pushed him forwards silently.

Woohyun, who was the head of the guards, would also too learn that he had a thing with running away when one day he saw Kibum swimming away in the night and stopped him. Kibum had to order him not to tell his mother and let him go out whenever he pleases. Woohyun automatically hates this idea but must let the Prince do whatever he pleases, and keeps his secret. Though Woohyun never admitted it, he was more accepting of the necessary escapes than Taemin, the bratty Lord’s son.

Kibum had decided that his life-long dream would be to go on shore somehow, and find a way to return the compass to the man that had previously owned it. He felt every time that he held it in his palms a secret touch, like he was being connected to someone close to him somehow, maybe even to his destiny. He would run his fingers over the alien letters and wonder what they meant. What the humans were saying with this instrument.

His nineteenth birthday is coming up soon and he knows that now is the time that he needs to go on his expedition before it is too late. He knows that when he turns nineteen these things will be too hard for him to do and he will not have enough time with all the new responsibilities that will be dumped upon him. He sighs and settles down into his pillows that night and settles a perfect date to go out and swim to shore—two nights from now, three days from his birthday.

-

“Your birthday is coming up,” his mother announces when they sit at the breakfast table the next morning—one day until the day. Breakfast is soggy and Kibum pushes it around on his plate until servants eventually take it away. He has never been a breakfast person anyways and his mother understands this when she sets her cutlery down.

“Yes, I do believe it is,” he replies dryly, brushing some of his bangs out of his eyes. He thinks that it may be time to get it cut soon, with how they flop down onto his face when he’s swimming, and he doesn’t want to tie it up in a ponytail like mermaids. He doesn’t want to be like Taemin at the slightest.

“And what would you like for your birthday? You can have anything my son,” she asks with a polite smile that makes Kibum slightly sick. Yes, of course he loves his mother. But sometimes he wasn’t sure if the smile that he received from her was any different from the one she addressed the city with, or if it was a warm one just for him, because the both were cold and unreadable.

“To touch the shore.”

This answer wasn’t very new. Since he was thirteen he had been giving the same answer to the question but anyways got simpler things like a new charm or a seahorse that he could ride or more books so that he could study the humans from a faraway distance. Her smile disappears at his answer and he isn’t surprised, pushing himself out of his seat at the table and heading off to his room. He stops at the doorframe and his mother stares at him.

“I know the answer is no, it’s ok.” She sighs and crumples in her seat, her black hair flowing down to her milky white skin. She’s a pretty swan with trimmed feathers.

-

“You’re crazy,” is all Taemin says about Kibum’s plan to escape tomorrow night. Kibum rolls his eyes and digs the compass out of the ship. He doubts he’ll be able to go to the ship tomorrow so he will bring the compass with him.

“You’re stupid,” Kibum replies.

“No seriously you are crazy. You will get killed. Didn’t you her about history in that fancy teaching of yours? If you even cross a meter past their boarders they will shoot you and you will be killed and I will not be there to help you, ok? You will die and I hope that then you will realize your dumb mistake!” Taemin’s fuming and his eyes bright.

“I will be fine, ok? And if you would just shut up about it, ok? I just told you because I knew that you were probably going to follow me like always.” Kibum slips the compass into his little satchel and buries some of his prized possessions in the sand to make sure that no traveler will notice it. “I will be home by sunrise. If I am not by noon, then you can sound the alarms and tell my mother. Until then, you must remain quiet!”

Taemin sighs, “Fine, your highness.”

“Thank you Taemin-ah,” Kibum chirps with a smile. “And anyways, I will be telling Woohyun too so you can run to him if I really am lost forever.” He winks and Taemin runs his fingers through his hair.

“You are such an idiot, your highness.”

“Someone has to be the idiot. Change doesn’t typically happen without the idiot.”

-

“You should have told me earlier, I could have planned more,” Woohyun sighs, looking around in his small office. “I am not even on duty tonight unless an emergency happens. This is supposed to be my day off! You know I suck at lying—how am I supposed to lie to my men and say that I just want to stay out for the night when I have been talking about my day off for the past six weeks?”

“I will give you more days off if you do, please,” Kibum begs, his hands on Woohyun’s shoulders and shaking him madly. The red-tailed merman pushes Kibum off of him and readjusts his short, black hair.

“I-I don’t know how I am supposed to do this, seriously.” He swims around to his desk and grabs his belt, strapping it around his waist and checking his sword. He looks back up at the pink-tailed Kibum and snarls. “Three weeks off every year or I will spill your secret out to everyone.”

“Yep~!” Kibum swims up and hugs him. He’s about to plant a kiss on his cheek when the door is kicked open and a purple-tailed and green-tailed pair enter the office—Howon and Dongwoo if Kibum remembers the guards’ names well enough—with wide eyes and pale faces.

“A human boat has entered the region and they are shooting at us! Woohyun-ah, help!” The green-tailed one, Dongwoo, screams. Woohyun swallows and swims past them out to the walls. There are lights above the water and Woohyun growls.

“Wake up Sunggyu-hyung and get him down here! And contact Junyoung and wake up his battalion. Tell Sunggyu to get the others and start fighting, and tell Junyoung to clear the people just in case!” Woohyun orders and grabs onto Howon’s arm. “No merman blood shall be spilt tonight!”

Suddenly the water lights up with flashes from the human’s guns and Kibum sees the fire from their weapons. The walls are still very far away from the castle and the townspeople, but Kibum can only imagine the dead warriors that protect the barriers. The castle was far away from the line that divided the humans from the mermen. If this was by accident, they would have received enough time to turn around and drive back home. No, this was an attack.

“Swine,” Kibum growls underneath his breath. He grabs onto Woohyun’s belt and fishes out his sword from its sheath. He swims upwards and ignores Woohyun’s complaints.

It is a fisherman’s boat, Kibum knows this. He can see the hooks used to kill fish and the nets that trail behind that have been pulled up. It has a big propeller and he dodges its fins to reach the top of the waves.

The air hits his face and he bobs in the water for a few seconds. A gun’s end is pointed in his direction and he ducks down when it fires. He remembers the day that Jinki explained to him in full detail the war between the merman and the humans—and explained the guns that they used to split open their fins so that they couldn’t swim away, and would then collect the scales or the tail for show.

“Ah!” Kibum screams when he gets back above the water. “Get away from our land or I will kill you!” He has not touched on his human-speak in a while and it sounds raw underneath the rain and the night that hits his face.

The gunman stares down at him with a degrading look. “You killed everything I had! You are destroying our lives! I will eradicate the problem before we have to face it again!” He pulls his gun back up and points it at Kibum, who swims back underneath the water and resurfaces underneath the man’s feet.

He swipes his arm so that the man falls blindly to the ground. Kibum pulls his sword up and is about to stab the man’s chest when a scream resounds and he sees many more gunmen run down towards him. Kibum growls and throws the sword at one of them, hitting his chest. He steals the man’s gun and tries his best to keep it above the water, kicking his tail furiously.

“Stand back vile humans! Or I will shoot you!” He is not sure if he conjugated the human-speak properly but the men’s faces change enough so he thinks he did is best. “Turn your ship around or the ship will hit the bottom of the ocean!” The men nod and swallow, dropping their guns and running back to the various parts of the ship. They all look tired and they are wearing loose clothing. The last one turns around and picks up a small object from the bottom of the boat, one that Kibum cannot see well, and turns back to look at Kibum.

It is a young face compared to the old men that man the ship or the gunman that crawls back slowly, trying to get away. He has shoulder-length brown hair and large, brown eyes that seem to seep into Kibum’s soul. His heart starts beating fast against his chest as the man watches him. He walks over to the hit man and pulls out Woohyun’s sword. He walks on the wet floor up to Kibum. He dips the sword into the water and they watch the blood seep from the blade into the dark, somber waves.

“You people,” mumbles the young man and he is about to hand the pink-tailed merman the sword when he crumples to the ground. In his back is a merman arrow, barely in his back, but still enough to paralyse him. Kibum screams and drops the gun into the ocean and pulls himself onto the boat. The rainwater keeps him wet enough to pull the arrow out of the young man’s back. The boat has started to move again and Kibum shrieks.

He slips out of the ship, but the man grabs onto his tail and looks at him with sleepy eyes. “Please, help,” he groans, his eyelids half-open and his mouth letting the rainwater in. Kibum swats him away and he falls back into the water, but the man crawls forwards, trying his best to grab onto Kibum once more. Kibum swims away, and so the man pushes himself off of the boat. He lands into the water with a splash and doesn’t float.

Kibum dives down underneath the water with a gasp and catches the heavy man as he descends down. He swims back up to the air with difficulty to try to keep the man alive.

“Are you ok?” Kibum asks over the rain and now thunder. The man groans in response.

Kibum sighs and starts swimming after the boat, now far away from the castle. He pushes himself to go faster, his satchel hitting his side with every powerful kick. The man is heavy and he has trouble kicking sometimes and keeping is head out of the water but he tries with all of his might. He closes his eyes and screams out for help, for the people to wait, but the boat has distanced itself far away now so that he cannot get his voice across. He just makes sure to follow the ship as blindly as possible.

This man will come out alive.

-

Minho moans when he opens his eyes. His back hurts tremendously and he feels like he’s been sleeping on a bed of rock all night. He barely remembers what had happened the night before; he was sure that Youngwoon was on guard and he was carrying a gun but he wasn’t entirely sure what had happened after that. He felt so sore and his eyes stung.

He pushed himself up and instantly the need to vomit ran through him. He turned to the side and puked on the rock. When he looked up, he realized he wasn’t in the barracks anymore. He was in a cave that went to the ocean. It was a bright and sunny day and it seemed like everything was perfectly fine. Waves entered the cave and hit the shores, but he was in deep enough so that no water could hit him. When he reached up, his hair was just a little wet near the tips.

Minho decided that it was probably a good idea to get up and explore the cave that he was in to find out how he could get home. He was unsure about the limits—was he in mermaid territory? Was an army of mermen ready to attack him when he stood at the mouth of the cave? He prayed to God that he was safe from that threat, and wiggled his hips to try to get his legs awake for they felt asleep.

“I-I can’t feel my legs!” Minho screamed; his back aching once more as he tried to move his legs. Nothing was working—his legs refused to move. He rolled onto his stomach and started sobbing—he was dead. He was stuck in a cave and he couldn’t move—he was therefore dead. If he had his legs he could swim. It would be long and meddlesome but he would be able to. And dying trying to save himself would be better than waiting for the hunger.

“Shh.”

He turns to the voice and sees a face and shoulders poking out of the water that slides into the cave. Porcelain skin and blonde bangs that dip into his light brown eyes. His arms dry on the rock, revealing some of his abs from above the water and his arms are skinny but defined. His eyes look like they could stare quite harshly but he gazes on him with a soft look, the corners of his eyes showing off some worry.

Minho’s eyes linger behind the face and he sees the tips of a pink tail splashing in the calmed water. He’s taken aback and he tries pushing himself away when the man’s hand flies up and grabs onto Minho’s ankle. His hand looks cold and wrinkled and the warm water drips down Minho’s pant leg and pools underneath his leg on the stone. They hold their gaze before Minho finally settles down and the merman lets his foot go. It flops uselessly on the ground.

“I mean not to hurt you human. If I did, I would have killed you much sooner,” the merman says in chopped up speak like a small babe still learning phrases. The air is cold and his lips look purple. He looks down in the water and mumbles something underneath his breath in a language Minho cannot comprehend, before looking back up and breathing through his nose. “Are you hungry or thirsty?”

Minho looks down at his stomach. He had been eating some of the worse fish and crackers for the past few days and he would love something better. Certainly a merman would know how to get some of the better foods and maybe even something fresher than the things Minho had been having recently. He considered that the merman might try to poison him, but hadn’t he stated that if he wanted him dead, he would have already killed him?

He nodded, “I am really hungry.”

The merman seemed to understand, and pointed at his eyes, “You haven’t had any fruits recently. How you humans hurt yourselves.” Before Minho can reply, he dives under the water and leaves Minho in the cave all alone. He doesn’t return until sundown.

-

Dining on seaweed and salmon, Minho eats with his hands. The merman has helped him press against a rock in the cave so that he can sit up and eat. The merman eats some seaweed and some type of vegetation that Minho has never seen before on the other side of the cave, still half-way in the water. He watches with half-open eyes as Minho pulls apart the salmon. It isn’t cooked but it tastes delicious.

“I’m sorry,” Minho mumbles and sets the food aside. The merman looks up at him with puzzled eyes and mouth agape.

“Why?” The merman asks, swishing his pink tail to keep himself afloat.

“Did you have to kill one of your fishy friends for me to have dinner? Isn’t that like you killing your subjects?” Minho asks sheepishly, rubbing the back of his head. The merman laughs.

“The fishes do not care for us, and we cannot even talk to them! We are like you humans, we kill them for food. But instead of throwing their carcasses away we use them for our weapons. The sinew is quite strong. We typically do not kill sharks and whales for they are majestic creatures,” the merman explained with a small smirk placed on his lips.

“Oh, I guess I screwed up pretty badly on that one,” Minho laughs, and the merman chuckles with him. His face is pretty when he laughs, Minho thinks. The silence stretches between them and the sunset creeps in with the wrinkled sea. “What is your name? If mermen have names of course.”

“Kim Kibum, Prince Kibum if you are going to be specific.” He brushes some of his blonde hair out of the way and on his forehead Minho sees a small headband-like contraption around his head, with a diamond in the middle. By the way he parts his hair; it looks as if he is hiding it.

“I’m Choi Minho,” Minho answers, “Son to a fisherman; so not that interesting your highness.”

Kibum rolls his eyes and flips his hair. “Please don’t be like that. I have to deal with it all the time back home. Please just call me Kibum.”

“It is a name I am used to back home,” Minho says, “Come to think of it, why does a merman have such a human name?”

Kibum shrugged. “I am the change or something like that. I never really understood that either.” He ducked underneath the water for a couple of seconds and resurfaced beside Minho. His hair looked shiny and luscious and Minho tried to keep himself from touching his locks. “How are your legs? The arrow went in pretty deep and I—“

“Can you tell me what happened last night? I don’t remember anything.” Minho blushes at Kibum’s shocked response. His hips rise and his tail pushes against the top of the water. It shines in the late sun and Minho has found it hard to put a name to the colour of Kibum’s tail. In the morning it was pastel and bright, but now it seemed darker, lustier.

“I am not much of a story-teller though,” Kibum explained with a soft laugh, “I have people to tell stories for me.”

“You don’t have to write a novel, just explain what happened. It would be nice to hear it from your lips before Youngwoon’s or the other crew members,” Minho persists, “And it looks like I won’t be able to really move for a while seeing as my legs are paralyzed.”

Kibum bites down on his bottom lip and runs his fingers through his hair. “Um, ok? Well, I was with the guards when your ship went past our lines. Seeing as your ship was way past the line that separated us we attacked. I attacked this guy, I don’t know his name but he had a rifle and I accidentally threw a sword at someone’s chest when they were trying to save him. Um, then you appeared, and you took the sword from the guy and I told you guys to leave or I would kill you? The ship turned around and you were about to give me my sword back when one of my men shot you with the arrows—why you’re paralyzed I guess. You fell off the ship and I tried swimming you back to them but your boats are quite fast, and so I had to stop here and make sure you were still ok.”

He breathes and finds new interest in a rock when Minho’s face finally moves.

“You saved my life?” Minho asks. Kibum coughs but doesn’t reply. Minho cocks his head to the side. “Kibum-sshi, did you save my life? I want an answer.”

“If you really want to know, then yes, I did save your life, ok? Not really though, you’re paralyzed and I doubt anyone from your side will pick you up,” Kibum answers, picking at the rock with his fingernails, “I just didn’t believe that you should die when you didn’t look like someone that would attack mermen. You looked out of place on that ship. The gunman didn’t look out of place but you were; like a child at a slaughterhouse.”

Minho reached out to Kibum, who slowly backed away onto the other side of the cave. “I should let you sleep. If you need me, just dip your fingers down in the water, and I’ll be up, ok?” Kibum nods with his lips tightly pressed together before ducking down and leaving Minho in silence. Minho sighs and presses his head against the rock.

-

Minho wakes up in the middle of the night screaming and soaked in cold sweat. He tries sitting up but his chest screams with newfound pain. He reaches around to the wound and sees blood on his fingers when he draws his fingers back. He winces through his teeth and closes his eyes. Minho pants and drops his hand down into the water, biting on the inside of his cheek to distract himself from the pain.

A hand touches his and Kibum reaches the surface. Without words he is able to address the situation and pulls himself out of the water so that he can sit beside Minho. He groans when Kibum turns him onto his side, his legs rolling around lifelessly. A wet hand pulls up Minho’s shirt and inspects the wound. He lets out a small shriek when he’s assessed the situation. He drops the shirt back down and grabs some of the cave water, scooping it into his hands and cleaning Minho’s wound from the rocks and pebbles that have found their way inside.

“Sleep softly, sing soundly,” Kibum sings underneath his breath, leaning close to Minho’s ear. Minho can feel Kibum’s fast heartbeat against his back when Kibum leans closer. “I have asked some of my men to come, my best friend actually, but I have no idea how long it will take him to get here, unfortunately. The poison from the arrow is rapidly spreading; you may not be able to use your chest soon.”

Minho’s heartbeat quickens and he bites down on his cheeks even harder, drawing blood. “W-why won’t you just kill me? I am a human! Are you just watching me die with a smile on your face? Do you find this entertaining?!” He screams and salt water runs down his cheeks.

“No,” Kibum whispers, “You will live Choi Minho. I will do anything to make sure that you live!” Kibum helps him back onto his back and pressed up against the rock. In the early morning light, Minho sees the tearstains down his cheeks and the way his lips quiver. Minho has the pain, but he never imagined how difficult it must have been for Kibum to have to deal with this for such a long time.

“You haven’t failed me Kibum,” Minho said, reaching up to cup Kibum’s face. “I appreciate all you did for me, even with our…differences.”

Kibum smiles and Minho is stung with the beauty of his pure smile. He leans in and gives the pink-tailed merman a soft kiss upon the lips and ignores the searing pain in his back to continue when Kibum kisses back.

He falls asleep softly.

-

Kibum has a restless night. Since mending Minho’s wound he has been on edge. He’s tried everything to get the human to open his eyes again, pressing his hands to Minho’s neck to make sure that his pulse is still there and his heart is still beating. The sun takes too long to rise and Jinki is taking way too long to get here. He was sure that Jinki knew the whole ocean—why was it taking him so long?

Yesterday whilst catching food for Minho, Kibum had found a merman who was hurt from the previous night’s battle. He lied, saying that there was a merman trapped in a cave that needed help, and so Kibum had promised him that he wouldn’t leave him until he got helped. He asked for Jinki, the only person that would be smart enough to help him but still accept Kibum’s rash actions. Jinki’s father was much smarter but he would never help Minho, even if it was an order.

The poison from the arrow was slowly seeping through his body. He knew that it would target his legs first and he was not surprised when Minho exclaimed that he couldn’t feel his legs. As the day progressed so did the disease and Kibum knew that it would soon take over his chest if Jinki didn’t arrive soon.

The feeling of Minho’s lips still stuck to his lips even now as he waited underwater at the ocean floor, the sand as his bed and the rock as his make-shift pillow. He lifted his hand up to touch his lower lip, imagining the strong hands on his face and the control of it all.

“Prince Kibum?”

Kibum knows exactly who it is by the voice and he swims to Jinki, wrapping him up in a fierce hug. “You arrived! Finally!”

“It has only been a night since I received the message, but I made sure to come as soon as possible. And speaking of fast, where is this merman? We should transport him back home quickly so that he can recover. I have brought the elixir but there may be more necessary depending on the wound,” Jinki explained, digging into his messenger bag and pulling out a small vial with a green liquid trapped inside.

“That’s the thing,” Kibum started, grabbing onto Jinki’s hand and pulling him up to the surface. He pointed to the sleeping Minho, who sat pressed up against the rock, his palm open out, as it had been when Kibum had finally let go out of his hand to try to sleep. “It’s a human.”

Jinki started coughing widely with his eyes wide and full of shock. “Master Kibum! You of all people should know how much you should hate a human! Plus, this must be one that attacked the kingdom just a night ago! Our castle is still in shambles because of their guns! Why in the world did you not let him drown?”

“He seemed different. He isn’t like the rest of them I promise.” Kibum blinks and Jinki sighs, swimming up to the human and unscrewing the top off of the bottle. With precision, Jinki opens Minho’s lips and dribbles in the contents of the bottle, making sure that none of it drips down his cheek or chin. He closes his lips and moves Minho’s head so that he can swallow.

“Do you know how far it has spread?” Jinki asks and turns his head to face Kibum once more.

“When he woke up this morning it was almost at his chest and yesterday it had already taken over his legs. If you hadn’t come he would have trouble moving his arms I believe,” Kibum explains, swimming up to the human and resting his hand inside Minho’s. Minho’s hands are so much bigger than his fragile ones. “He had trouble sleeping last night I know.”

Jinki sighed. “You know that that dosage will not be enough for his survival. If you want him to live your highness, he will have to go get more at the castle. But you will not be allowed inside the walls without him for he is a human.”

Kibum rubs the back of his head. “I promised him he wouldn’t die.”

Jinki turns to Kibum and Kibum turns to him and they look at each other. The silence stretches through and all Kibum can hear is the ringing in his ears and the soft pull of the ocean that begs him to come back home. He thinks about Taemin and Woohyun who must be scared to death and the thoughts of his mother. He wonders if Jinki told them that he was alive or didn’t have the time to. Were they doing his funeral now?

“You know I can do something to save him, to make him accepted,” Jinki said, “But you should not be allowed to make such a decision so rashly. And without his permission.”

“Please,” Kibum begs, “I promised to keep him alive.”

Jinki runs his hair through his chestnut, curly hair, and reaches into his bag. He pulls out an old, ratty book, one that he must have stolen from his father. He flips pages until he finds one near the middle. It’s written in the archaic language of before and Kibum can only make out a few sentences. Jinki chants it underneath his breath as he reads.

“It says that only true love can do this,” Jinki says. Kibum waves him to continue. “Either the merman must be on the earth or the human in the ocean, and they must kiss. They must chant some words after the kiss and if the gods and the stars above approve, one will change.” Kibum nods and starts pulling at Minho’s arm to pull him into the water. That will certainly wake him up.

Jinki sets a hand on his arm. “Do you really want to do this?”

“He kissed me, Jinki. It was my first kiss. I now know why I am the strong leader, why I am the son after so many daughters. I was chosen to stop the fighting between man and merman. And Minho made me open up my eyes and realize this. Not all of them are bad; we just assumed they were,” Kibum says. Jinki nods and helps Minho into the water.

“What is going on?” Minho groans, keeping his eyes closed. With some difficulty, Kibum and Jinki are able to make him float on his back.

“We’re saving you,” Kibum said. He reads off the words to Minho and Minho nods drowsily. He doesn’t ask why they are doing this nor who Jinki is, just floats with the sea and smiles when Kibum gives him a soft peck on the cheek for his co-operation.

When everything is set Kibum kisses Minho. All he does is pray in his thoughts and hopes that this will work, that everything will go right. Minho moans against his lips and Kibum wonders how much he hurts or how much he can feel now. Minho’s lips move against his and they kiss for a very long time before air calls to Minho’s lungs and they pull apart. They start chanting underneath their breaths—Kibum makes sure he doesn’t mess up and Minho keeps their eyes locked.

A flash of light erupts and Kibum is pressed up against the rock. He covers his eyes so that he doesn’t blind himself, feeling the force of the waves press against his stomach. He cannot see Jinki either and hopes that he is safe wherever he is.

The light dims and Kibum sees Minho on top of the water. He looks down and sees, instead of two, long legs, a beautiful orange tail with two fins at the bottom. His back still bleeds but Minho is a merman now. He is one of them.

Kibum swims up to him and kisses him ferociously on the lips, pulling him down underneath the water and spinning them. Minho laughs against his lips and Kibum helps him hold hands. His chest is better because of the elixir but he needs medication. Jinki helps them pack up their stuff in his bag and they try to swim back as fast as Minho can.

-

Everyone is surprised to see a new merman appear with Prince Kibum and Scholar Jinki a day later. Minho has trouble swimming because of the arrow and so they rush him to the hospital to get the rest of the elixir and sew up his back. He stays in the hospital for a couple of days until they deem him healthy enough. When he exits Kibum announces that he is ready to marry to Minho and everyone cheers.

Taemin grumbles and Woohyun smiles when Kibum gets married six months later. They don’t disapprove of course, but Kibum has decided to not let them in on the true secret of Minho’s origins. Jinki promises to keep Minho’s past a secret and the couple are able to sleep at night with the knowledge that their secret is safe.

Three months after their marriage Minho says that he’s homesick, and wishes to see his mother before he leaves her for a life under the sea. Kibum accepts this and organizes a caravan consisting of Woohyun, Jinki and the couple to go to the human world to visit his mother. He sends a message in a bottle three days prior, hoping that it reaches her so that when they arrive at the shoreline at midnight she will be there.

She is.

“I missed you mom,” Minho says, hugging her in the water. She weeps on his shoulder.

“I thought I had lost you!” There are a bunch of hugs and kisses and Kibum is introduced with a sheepish smile and a trusting hug.

“Thank you,” she says to Kibum, “Thank you for making my son so happy.”

Kibum shakes his head, “Thank you too mother. Now, I believe that this is yours.” He fishes the compass out of his messenger bag and hands it to her. “When I saw you, I knew that you knew who this belonged to. I have been keeping it safe for you.” He closes his hand around hers and kisses her forehead.

-

“Jongin, Chanyeol, get back here!” Kibum screams, swimming around the castle to catch his two children. He grabs onto Chanyeol’s long tail and pulls him into his chest. At the sudden loss of his brother, Jongin stops and swims shyly into his father’s arms.

“Can we go to the humans today?” Chanyeol asks with wide eyes. Jongin nods to agree.

Kibum smiles, “Haven’t Kris and Lu Han seen you guys enough this week? Little princes shouldn’t be so far away from the castle all the time.”

Minho swims up and snakes his arms around Kibum’s waist. “Let them go see their friends, honey. They will stay close, yes?” The two boys nod enthusiastically. “See, told you.”

Kibum sighs. “Fine, and say hi to Jinki and Jonghyun for me, ok?” The two boys smile and swim out of their father’s grasp, swimming as quickly as possible to shore.

The castle now sits closer to the humans since the peace treaty. There are no borders and no lines. The humans can come as often as they want and the mermen can lie on their shores like a family at the beach. The guard is almost broken and Woohyun has many days off because of this.

“Come here,” Minho says, turning his husband around and kissing him passionately on the lips. “Why the frown? I remember someone being very adventurous when they were of that age.”

“I know, but I’m just scared that they’ll be wishing to turn into humans or something.” Minho laughs and pecks his cheeks.

“They’ll be fine,” Minho persists, “Now, let’s go back inside.” He grabs onto Kibum’s hand and pulls him inside.

--
end.
a/n: thanks people on twitter who pulled me through this! this was one of the fics i was really proud of and i didn't want it to be so long it just happened.
a/n1: minkey is always welcome. always.

yo my home skillets

mywookness — Fri, 21 Dec 2012 03:19:53 GMT

Going on vacation.

Now if anyone of you were with me last Christmas break, you would know that I still write a lot during the Christmas break even if I am in the US (compared to Canada). I don't know about the first week but the second week is a yes - I will be writing. I will finish VIVA when I return home and finish some of my final projects even though it was supposed to be done but anyways. And check for some of the secret santas I have written this year! I really like my SHINee one~ I will do a reflection post about this cruel experience of self-mutilation on my blog (mywookness @ lj) if you wanna read it in the next couple of days.

Also, we have reached over 430 members and 400 posts! That is pretty awesome guys. I love you all my yeobos and I hope only the best for the next year! And February 2nd is the anniversary of honeystrings, so I will be doing something special for y'all on that day!

Happy Holidays! I am sorry that I forgot to wish you all Happy Hanukkah but I hope this makes do.

- Jules (Je)

mer rouge {ocs}

mywookness — Fri, 21 Dec 2012 02:18:24 GMT

mer rouge
ocs
angoisse ; pg-13
note - cette histoire est en francais = this story is in french.

Il était une fois une petite ville qui si se situait dans le milieu d’un désert. Avant il y avait un petit lac sur le bord de cette ville, mais depuis des années, il n’a pas plu, et le lac est devenu aride. Les citoyens ont commencé à partir quand l’eau a disparue et les puits ne trouvaient pas d’eau. Cette ville s’appelait Petilac, «petit lac », même quand toute l’eau était partie.

Quand le lac était plein d’eau, des milliers de personnes voyageaient à Petilac pour vendre leurs marchandises ou ils arrêtaient leur voyage pour rester dans un hôtel. La ville était dans le désert, alors Petilac a était perçu comme un voyage spécial et luxueux—seules les personnes qui avaient l’argent pourraient y aller, alors Petilac a grandi comme une ville riche. Les voyageurs de l’Europe et du Moyen Orient voulaient mettre leurs pieds dans l’eau du lac car une rumeur disait que l’eau donnait la chance.

Mais les visiteurs ont arrêté de visiter Petilac quand l’eau s’est mise à baisser. Les vendeurs et les aubergistes ont fermé leurs services et beaucoup de citoyens sont partis. Après six ans, il restait seulement le maire et sa famille, et une vieille dame qui vivait dans la maison le plus proche à l’ancien lac.

Le maire de la ville, Monsieur Dupont, avait perdu beaucoup d’argent. Son fils aîné, Jean, était parti de la maison quand il était très jeune, et sa femme était très malade de déshydratation. Ses quatre enfants restaient dans la maison parce que le soleil brulait leur peau facilement. Un matin, quand sa femme ne pouvait plus sortir de son lit, Monsieur Dupont a décidé d’aller à la maison de la vieille dame pour demander de l’aide.

Il cogna à la porte. Il essaya de ne pas regarder le lac sec, mais ses yeux errèrent et avant que la vieille dame n’ouvre la porte, il vit les rides dans la terre et le sol jaune et malade.

- C’est quoi l’occasion, Monsieur le maire, demande la petite vieille quand elle ouvre la porte.

-Ma femme est horriblement malade et j’ai besoin de médicaments. Vous êtes sage et je pensais que vous sauriez comment la guérir, » dit Monsieur Dupont.

La dame secoua sa tête.

- Elle a besoin de ce qu’on a besoin, Monsieur le Maire, elle a besoin d’eau.

-Mais comment est-ce qu’on peut avoir de l’eau? On n’est pas proche d’une grande ville et nos puits ne trouvent rien de spécial.

La vieille dame pense un petit peu, mais avec un hochement de la tête, elle rentre dans sa maison et revient avec une cape et un couteau long et fin. Elle les lui passe, et pointe au lac sec.

-Demander aux dieux pour la pluie. S’ils pensent que vous êtes un homme humble et loyal, ils vont vous donner la pluie. Mais attendez—les dieux veulent toujours un prix pour ce qu’ils donnent alors ne soyez pas paresseux. » Elle hocha sa tête encore et retraite a sa maison, laissant Mr. Dupont avec le lac.

Il marcha au milieu du lac, ses pieds lourds et le couteau coupant ses pantalons en marchant. Le soleil battait sur lui et sa gorge devint rapidement seche, mais il continua, jusqu’à il ne trouve pas de nuages dans le ciel et que le soleil soit presque couché. Il mit la cape sur la terre stérile et s’agenouilla dessus la cape. Le couteau tomba avec lui, et fit une brèche dans le sol sèche.

-Les dieux, si vous m’entendez, est-ce que vous pouvez emmener la pluie? Petilac a vraiment besoin de la pluie. Ma femme a vraiment besoin de la pluie…

Il commença à pleurer. Tous ses sentiments sortissent avec la première larme qui touche la terre, et y entre.

Le ciel devint couvert de nuages, et le maire leva les yeux au son du tonnerre. En quelques secondes, la pluie commença à tomber et a toucher ses joues. Il se leva et dança dans la pluie. Il y resta jusqu’à ce que ses cheveux soient mouillés et ses pantalons collent à ses jambes. Avec la pluie, ses problèmes disparaissaient; il se sent jeune.

-Marie! Marie! Cri-a-t-il quand il entra dans sa maison.

Il courut à la chambre de sa femme et la prit dans ses bras. Il la laissa nager dans le lac, il la laissa boire l’eau qui tombait du ciel. Il chercha les seaux et les mit dessous les maisons pour collectionner la pluie. Ses enfants courent dehors et dansent dans la pluie.

Il plut pour cinq jours.

Sur le sixième jour, il arrêta de pleuvoir. Les seaux étaient pleins d’eau et le lac était une marée baissé. Le maire pouvait nager dans l’eau pour se laver. Sa femme était moins malade et elle pouvait se tenir debout. Des voyageurs arrêtèrent dans la ville pour quelques jours, et ils devinrent amis avec le maire.

Il était prêt à visiter un nouvel ami quand la vieille dame cogna à sa porte.

-Oui, madame? demanda le maire.

-Avez-vous remercié les dieux? Il y a six jours maintenant.

-Non, mais je le ferai dans quelques jours. La pluie a emmené beaucoup, oui?

-Oui. J’espère que vos quatre enfants l’aiment. »

La vielle dame sourit. L’homme courut en haut de sa maison en essayant de trouver ses enfants. Le soleil est intense et brillant, et le désert semble tout le même. Il entre dans toutes les maisons en cherchant ses enfants, mais ne les trouve pas. Sa femme a disparu, elle aussi. Quand il crie pour quelqu’un, personne ne répond.

Le ciel réfléchit l’eau—rouge vif. Le maire met ses pieds dans l’eau et y trouve ses enfants. Le couteau flotte à ses pieds avec les vagues et la lame saignant rouge. Les petits os touchent ses orteils mais il ne saute pas.

Le ciel s’ouvre et il commence à pleuvoir encore. Il pleut jusqu’à ce que l’homme soit engloutit, et le désert est couvert d’une mer. La mer rouge.

--
fin.
a/n: ecrit pour la classe de francais.

morning dew {siwon/han geng}

mywookness — Wed, 12 Dec 2012 00:29:46 GMT

morning dew
siwon/han geng
swan prince!au ; r
mentions of death, bad language
written for lopkite for the 2012 Super Junior Secret Santa at sujuexchange!

“Prince Siwon! Prince Siwon! It is time to get up!” Someone bangs on his door and Siwon rolls onto his side, covering his face with his covers and digging his chin further into his pillow. He knows that it’s roughly three more seconds before such intruder comes in and throws his covers off his bed, but the sheets are so warm—and why does he have to get up so early, anyways?

The door swings open and hits the wall with a loud ‘thump!’ Siwon groans when the covers are pulled out of his grasp and he is hit with the cold of the February air.

“You guys are so mean,” he complains, wrapping his arms around himself in a vain attempt of getting warmer. Heechul scoffs and hits his chest—his fingers are even colder than the air and it makes the slap ten times more painful.

“If your highness would wake up earlier every morning, we wouldn’t need to ‘be so mean’ as you put it,” Heechul replies and grabs one of Siwon’s arms, lifting him up to a sitting position. He slaps Siwon’s face for good measure. “A bath has been set; just the way you like it and in an hour breakfast will be prepared. I presume you won’t need me to clean behind your ears, yes?”

Siwon shakes his head, slowly disrobing from his pajamas and stretching his arms above his head. “No, I do believe I’ll be fine.”

Heechul smiles and bows at Siwon before heading to the door. “Happy twenty-first birthday, Prince Siwon,” he says before leaving Siwon with a smirk on his lips.

His bathroom is connected to his bedroom and it takes him a few easy strides to get it. Like Heechul had said, there is warm water in the bathtub and when he dips his toe in, it’s just the right temperature. He slowly eases himself into the water and rests his head on the side. It’s a tad bit small for him, so his knees come just bit out of the surface of the water, like little volcanoes separating themselves from the ocean.

It was his twenty-first birthday. He was honestly surprised that he had lived so much of his life already. Unlike most other princes, he hadn’t killed a dragon, saved a princess, almost lost his life trying to battle an evil Queen. Instead, he had been hanging back with his best friends (and Heechul unfortunately) and spending hour-long baths every morning and evening. He had a good education (with Heechul, unfortunately) and a memory of his dead father but a good Queen that could control the country without much guidance.

He slides further into the bathtub, his toes poking through the surface, and lets the water take his hair and spread it out. He would cut it soon, he decides, it was getting far too long for a man.

-

“Happy Birthday!”

Siwon smiles and kisses his mother’s cheek—she smiles back at him. He slides into his chair beside her at the end of the table. It’s the smaller table because it’s breakfast but Heechul is there, along with Kyuhyun his best friend and Changmin the snarky stable boy. In the corner is Ryeowook, one of Siwon’s favourite servants, who must have breakfast duty today because he gives him a glass of orange juice upon sitting down, and a small kiss on the cheek.

“Thank you everyone,” Siwon thanks, allowing everyone to start eating. There are conversations about the Grand Ball tomorrow night to celebrate his birthday, various relatives that will be coming, and what will be happening. Heechul reminds Siwon that he has French at two o’clock today and that Henry will be very angry if he doesn’t come on time again and Siwon smiles in response.

“And what are you going to be doing today, Siwon honey?” his mother asks and cocks her head to the side, threading her fingers today. Siwon shrugs.

“Probably the usual, hang out with Kyuhyun and Changmin until it’s time for classes, maybe do some archery,” Siwon explains nonchalantly. He wasn’t allowed to leave the property much because of the chance of evil-doers, so most of the time it was just a bit of archery and playing around with the lords and ladies inside the palace walls.

His mother smiles, “Well, if you are doing archery, then I must give you a present. Ryeowook, would you please fetch his present for me?” Ryeowook nods and shares a smile with Siwon before rushing through the servant doors. It takes him a few minutes to find the present, but when he comes back, Siwon is sure that the wait was worth it.

“Happy Birthday, your highness,” Ryeowook says and hands him the crossbow. Siwon takes it with cautious hands. There isn’t an arrow notched but this is much more complex than a bow and arrow than he has carried most of his life.

“You are allowed to go off and hunt in the woods today if you please,” his mother explains and Siwon reaches over and kisses her cheek once more.

“Thank you so much mother!” he screams, jumping up from the breakfast table and running out, followed by Changmin and Kyuhyun, who are also eager to test out the weapon.

Ryeowook shakes his head, “Giving a boy who cannot think a pen is never a good idea, madam.”

“I know, but I hope that he’ll become a man eventually,” she says, sipping on some water.

-

“My feet hurt!” Kyuhyun complains, kicking a rock and letting it tumble down the escarpment. Both Changmin and Siwon snarl at him to be quiet, but the lord’s son just complains even more, swinging his legs back and forth. “Seriously! We haven’t seen anything yet! Can’t we just go home?”

“Well maybe we’d see something if you weren’t scaring them off by talking so much!” Changmin counters, kicking his back so that Kyuhyun almost falls off the cliff. He shoots a look at Changmin who shrugs, turning back to Siwon.

Siwon stands up on a rock, surveying the lands. He has been standing there, like a statue, for almost an hour now as he waits for something to appear. On his back is a bag filled with arrows, ready to fire from his new crossbow. The crossbow sits in his hands, like a prized heirloom that he can never drop. He looks heroic, and if he didn’t have the crossbow in his hands, Changmin would expect him to have his hands on his hips.

“Do you think that we should retire, sir? It is almost dusk and the Queen must have a party planned for you upon your arrival home,” Changmin says, “And I don’t have the whole day off today, my father still wants me back to clean the horses at the end of the day.”

Siwon shakes his head, “I am fetching dinner for tonight.”

“But sir—“

“Swans!” Kyuhyun jumps up and points to the sky, where a flock of white birds flew overhead. Siwon jumped down from his post to run up to where Kyuhyun was sitting. His eyes followed the birds until they disappeared past the trees.

“They’re headed for the lake! Come on men, let’s go get dinner!” Siwon started running down the escarpment, almost falling a few times. Changmin sighs, starting a jog and following him. Kyuhyun groans and ends up falling down, twisting his ankle but continuing to run after Siwon. It was a bit of a task of course; Siwon was a horse.

When they reached the lake, the sun was setting. Kyuhyun and Changmin panted, Kyuhyun clutching his twisted ankle and Changmin with his hands on his knees, looking up at Siwon, who was crouched in the bushes.

“That one,” Siwon said, nodding at the swan in the center, “Is mine. You can have the others.”

The swan was much different from the other swans. Its coat seemed whiter, smoother, less dirty and soiled. And upon its head is a crown. At first Siwon is sure that it’s a trick, a swan cannot wear a crown! But it is there when he looks back from Kyuhyun, who notches an arrow onto his bow, and maybe that’s why he has called it to himself. Maybe this is the King or Queen of the swans, if possible—and what a delicious bird it must be.

He reaches back and finds an arrow, sliding it into the crossbow. The night is drawing closer and so therefore he must do this quickly, or he’ll have a bad shot. Changmin hides behind them, drawing a small knife from his pocket.

“One,” Siwon breathes, waiting for the swan in question to swim closer. It ducks underneath the water and Siwon growls.

“Two.” The swan does a small circle, splashing the water around him. Another swan comes up and pokes its neck, and they do a small dance. Siwon waits until the other one is far enough out of view. The bird looks up to the moon, which slowly surfaces.

“Thre-“He begins, but stops when a flash of light blinds him and the trio are sent back. Siwon rubs his eyes and jumps back to his original spot. He ignores the screaming and the wailing from his patrons and watches as where the swan swam is now a man wearing the same crown.

“Oh my god,” Siwon says aloud, watching as the man slowly wades through the water. The other swans watch him and the way they move their necks makes it seem like they’re bowing down to the man. The man throws his head back laughing.

Siwon has honestly never seen such an interesting person before. He’s tall, maybe even close to the height of the Prince, with short, blonde hair that’s cut short and bangs dip into his eyes. He wears a white dress shirt like Siwon is accustomed to and tight, white jeans. He’s barefooted and his toes wiggle dry. His eyes grow small when he smiles and his laugh goes to the heavens when he laughs.

He sits down on the barren earth, his legs wet from the lake water but his toes splashing in the water. The swans stay in the water, but they honk and the man replies like he is having a conversation with them.

“Hello,” Siwon says, stepping out from the bushes. The man is too exquisite and he ignores Changmin and Kyuhyun’s complaints from behind him. The man looks up, his blonde hair glimmering underneath the moonlight. “I am Prince Siwon.” Their eyes lock and Siwon’s heart beats faster.

The man stands up and takes a step back when Siwon extends his hand. “I promise that I am not a bad person, I just want to meet you, to learn your name.”

The man takes a tentative step. “Prince Han Geng, the Swan Prince.” He takes Siwon’s hand and shakes it firmly.

Siwon turns around at Changmin and Kyuhyun, who are poking their heads out of the bushes, “You two may leave now. Do not kill anything on your way home, either. This forest is sacred now.” They nod and rush towards the castle, leaving the two Princes by themselves. Siwon smiles at Han Geng. “Can I dance with you tonight? It is my birthday.”

Han Geng shrugs, “Because it is your birthday I will.”

They settle down on the ground like Han Geng was before, Siwon’s hand on Han Geng’s. “Thank you.”

Han Geng laughs, and one of the swans honk. Siwon watches as the swan swims up just a tad, pokes one of Siwon’s shoes before scuttling away. It honks at the other swans and they move their arms up and down.

Han Geng chuckles. “They say that they like you, boy,” he translates, reaching out and petting one of the swan’s heads. Siwon’s heart hurts when he says ‘boy’—he’s twenty-one now! He opens his mouth to say something but Han Geng holds up his hand. “You must be a brave Prince though, to come to this lake, and at night at that.”

“And why is that?” Siwon asks, stretching his legs out so that his ankles touch the wet rocks.

“Nothing,” Han Geng says and he watches the moon rise further up into the sky, until it shows in the lake’s water, and Han Geng’s hair looks silver and beautiful.

“Why is someone as beautiful as you cursed? Why must someone like you be hidden away in the daytime?” Siwon asks, reaching over and resting his hand on Han Geng’s shoulder. Han Geng leans in and rests his hands in his lap. He smells like lavender and morning dew.

“He took me away,” Han Geng said slowly, “He stole me when I was young and I didn’t know what was going on. He said that if I didn’t love him, he would curse me. He was cruel and when I tried to escape, he turned me into a swan. I would be a swan by day and a man by night. Only a true love, one that would last as long as his love for me would break the spell and I could return home.”

“I will love you eternally, Han Geng-sshi, I will free you from this bond that he mercilessly ties you to,” Siwon promises, and he feels something surge from deep in his chest. This is the first time that he has ever made such a grave decision but he believes that he likes the feeling and lets it spread further in.

“Thank you,” Han Geng whispers, and Siwon can hear the sob that dares to leave his throat. Siwon shushes him.

“Will you come to my ball tomorrow? I will show you to my mother and we can be wed the night after,” Siwon asks, looking down into Han Geng’s dazzling springtime eyes. The February air doesn’t seem so cold now and the snow doesn’t seem that hard underneath his boots.

Han Geng smiles, “I would love to go.”

Siwon slides his hand into Han Geng’s and they sit there until the morning rises and Han Geng slips back into the water.

-

“Where is the special guest?” Kyuhyun asks and Siwon hits him. He’s been standing at the door, waiting for Han Geng, for over an hour now. He knows it’s his party and he should be inside but he wants to be the first person to greet Han Geng when he arrives out of the forest. He wants to be the first person to throw his arms around him and maybe even give him a welcome kiss. He had only spoken good things about Han Geng to his mother and now he wanted to prove them.

“He’ll be here, soon,” Siwon promises, looking around nervously. His mother had invited himself inside countless times, sometimes with girls with her asking if they wanted to dance, but Siwon wanted to be here, he didn’t want to be inside with someone else. Han Geng said that he would be here, so he would be here. And Siwon would just have to wait.

A face appears through the trees and Siwon smiles. It’s him. He is wearing a white suit with a black undershirt and white tie, and Siwon’s heart beats a tad bit faster. He looks just a tad bit different, like his legs are longer and his bangs are shorter, but it’s only for a second and the Han Geng that he met last night. He tries his best not to jump down the stairs to meet him and waits until he walks up the steps.

“Good evening,” Siwon says, extending his hand. Han Geng smiles and takes it, and lets Siwon pull him through the throng of people to his mother. His mother smiles as politely as possible and introduces herself.

“I have heard many things about you Han Geng,” she said and bowed. “I am happy that you were able to come, even if a tad bit late. I have some more people to see, but I promise to come back to you two later on in the night.”

With a smile, she went off to find some other people.

“You want to dance?” Siwon asked and Han Geng smiled.

“Of course.”

Siwon pulls him out onto the dance floor, resting his hands on Han Geng’s sides and arms, smiling when Han Geng lets him lead. Dancing was a subject that he had also learned from Heechul, and he hoped that the teacher was watching with a smile. He wasn’t stepping on Han Geng’s feet!

“You’re still going to love me forever, right?” Han Geng asks, moving his hand on Siwon’s shoulder up and down. The tentativeness from last night has disappeared but Siwon brushes it off, it must be the excitement pounding in each other’s veins.

“Of course, I haven’t changed my opinion at all,” Siwon answers, reaching down to cup Han Geng’s face. But when his fingertips graze against the skin, the face changes and Siwon is looking down at something way different. A longer face, red devil hair, and sparkling eyes.

“Good.”

-

“Prince Han Geng! Prince Han Geng!” Siwon is hit with the branches of various trees as he speeds through the forest. He stops in front of the lake. Moonlight hits his lover’s soaked face and his bony fingers. Han Geng looks up and their eyes lock.

His pupils are diluted and his veins are black. Han Geng still has that eternal beauty but something has broken, something has snapped inside him and Siwon crumples in front of him. He cups his face and tries to kiss his lips but Han Geng turns away. His tears are as ebony as the sky and his body shakes like the trees.

“I am so sorry,” Siwon says into Han Geng’s hair.

“How could you? How could you not see the difference between me and him?” Han Geng grabs onto Siwon’s shirt and pulls his face into his neck. His shoulders shake and the swans behind them honk and flap their wings.

“I am so sorry. Can I still change it? Can I still make you free?” Siwon asks, patting Han Geng’s back and trying to make him stop crying. He knows what he did. He was supposed to be loyal to him forever but the redhead must have fooled him.

“No.” Han Geng pulls away, shaking his head. He looks away when Siwon looks into his eyes and tries getting up but Siwon grabs onto his hand.

“What can be done then?” Siwon asks. Han Geng looks back at the swans and they honk at him.

“We can die.”

-

A band of missing people return home that night, shaking their heads and blinking the tears away. The morning sun rises and so do the royals.

--
end.
a/n: based on the original ballet version and not the animated. Both are wonderful and one makes up my childhood but yes, I chose the original.

original sound tracks (to our love) {kyuhyun/sungmin}

mywookness — Wed, 12 Dec 2012 00:22:20 GMT

original soundtracks (to our love)
kyuhyun/sungmin ; yesung/ryeowook
fluff ; pg-13
mentions of porn and bad language
written for the community for the 2012 Super Junior Secret Santa at sujuexchange! Thank you viridian_blue5 for looking over my fic!

October – Close Encounters with the Third Kind

The floorboards squeak as the creature takes a step closer, the beast’s fingers flexing open and closed, a sneer upon its lips. “You have nowhere to run now,” it says, the voice raw and low, like a scream from the underworld. It reaches out; its bloodied palms grabbing at the woman’s collar and its fingernails digging into the main character’s neck.

“Ahhhhhh!” Ryeowook screams, kicking his feet up into the air. He hides his face in the covers, knocking over the bowl of popcorn that sits on Jongwoon’s lap in the process. The white and yellow treat falls onto Kyuhyun’s lap, and they all groan in process. In the fray, Kyuhyun hits the pause button—just at the close-up of the evil character.

Kyuhyun sits up, pushing the blanket from his lap and glaring at Kim Ryeowook, brushing the popcorn off of his jeans so that it falls down on Jongwoon’s wooden floor. “Thanks for that, Ryeowook.”

“Dude, stop—and pick that up. I don’t want my parents screaming at me for the mess you two leave behind all the time,” Jongwoon says, rolling his eyes. His little sibling had a habit of snitching seconds after Kyuhyun and Ryeowook left to his parents about the ‘big mess Jongwoon had made!’ and that ‘you had to come down and see!’

Kyuhyun groans in protest, picking up the fallen popcorn and throwing it back into the purple bowl that now sits on Ryeowook’s lap, earning a “Hey!” from both Ryeowook and Jongwoon. He huffs, throwing himself back onto the couch, beside Ryeowook who sits in the middle, and covering his legs with the blanket because it is fucking freezing in Jongwoon’s basement.

“Why do you always have to scream whenever we watch a horror movie?” Kyuhyun snaps, turning to Ryeowook and giving him a glare. Ryeowook shrivels up at the look, trying his best to hide under Jongwoon’s arm. Jongwoon sighs, his attention being captured by a very interesting doorknob.

“I’m sorry,” Ryeowook huffs, brushing some of his red-purple bangs out of his eyes and looking down at the now-contaminated bowl of popcorn.

“I knew we should have watched Star Trek Season Five,” Jongwoon mumbles. Everyone promptly ignores him.

“But you were the one that asked to watch a horror movie! Getting ready for Halloween, remember? All the scary masks, remember? You wanted to watch some so that you would be used to the ‘scary’ stuff that has scared you for fifteen years of your life!” When Kyuhyun has finished his rant, Ryeowook looks like he’s on the brink of tears and Jongwoon is completely disinterested.

Ryeowook moved the bowl of popcorn side to side, watching as it moved back and forth, back and forth. “I don’t know why I’m so scared during Halloween, I seriously don’t know why. Everyone makes so much fun of me, too! I don’t want to be made fun of, Kyuhyun-ah, I want to be strong! I thought that if I practiced, I might be able to face the fear that I have. That people will stop laughing at me whenever I scream because I see someone dressed up as Hello Kitty, for Pete’s sake if I prepare myself. You guys are my best friends, and I thought that you wouldn’t laugh and get mad at me…”

By this time, Jongwoon has his arms around Ryeowook’s torso and is screaming at Kyuhyun for being such a meanie, and that they should have started with a less-scarier movie, like ‘And Then It Happened’, instead of some unknown film that he had randomly picked from the movie store. Kyuhyun sighed, mumbling something about it being on sale and it wasn’t that scary, seriously.

To keep it brief, they retired for the night, promising each other that next week they would face a scary movie and finish it all. Just not tonight. And plus, there was homework that Kyuhyun hadn’t finished.

-

Kyuhyun lives a very sheltered life to many people. For one, his glare makes it seem as if he hates everyone. In reality—he doesn’t, but he finds the short skirts that some girls wear appalling and really, why do men have this fascination with smoking or drinking? He keeps his days to waking up, eating his breakfast, going to school, learning things, and then going home and finishing his homework. If all that is finished, he might go to an Internet café and play some games, or just stay home and watch some dramas with his sister.

It honestly depends.

He was still a freshman so he wasn’t ‘the talk of the school’ or anything, just a new kid to high school who would, unfortunately, have to slush through four, or more, years of this terrible system. Thankfully his grades were kept high enough so that his parents wouldn’t have to go all ballistic and force him into any cram schools to make sure that he got into a good university yet. He got good grades, hung around the right people, and didn’t do drugs. Kyuhyun considered that the recipe to a wonderful son.

How he met up with Kim Jongwoon and Kim Ryeowook, a senior and a sophomore, you ask?

Kyuhyun had been strolling through the hallways, back when he was pretty much a loner and didn’t have that much interest in getting friends, when he had happened to be pushed into the line that went directly to the library.

With dismay, he found himself in the library with no clue of what he was supposed to do next. He had already finished his homework; the main reason why so many people were in the library. He could take out some manhwas and pretend that to be reading until the bell rang. Yeah, Kyuhyun decided, that sounded like good idea. And so, with a smile, Kyuhyun started walking through the library, finding out where the manhwas were.

He stopped to gaze upon its utmost beauty. He had never seen that many books, and so full! He could see one to twenty for many of the manhwas, and he jumped up in a very ‘pwnage’ kind of way, punching the air as he did so. A few people turned to stare at him but he pretended not to see them.

Kyuhyun ran his finger over the covers, squealing in glee at the feel of the thousands upon thousands of books underneath his touch. He stopped half-way, his eyes growing wide and his body screaming ‘want’ when his eyes fell on the sixteenth book of his favourite series. He had discovered the book series last summer, when he was bored and tired of experimenting with his pre-pubescent body and was trying to forget the fact that he was moving up to high school. Unfortunately, the municipal library didn’t have that many books, and stopped at fifteen, and his pocket money was spent on buying the last book available on novel sites. He had watched all of the animated show, but this was different. You could touch and flip.

“Oh my gosh,” Kyuhyun mumbled underneath his breath, reaching out to grab the edges of the book, his fingers pushing against the other copies. He squealed with glee. Honestly, he could probably take the other seven to finish the series and probably finish all his homework in a week. That English work wasn’t due until Monday, anyways, he told himself. A smirk pulled to his lips, and as he was about to pull the books out, a hand reached out and took the books fifteen through twenty-one. Including sixteen.

Kyuhyun turned, determined to kill whoever had laid their hands on his prized book. He was greeted by a pair of glasses, a small face, and reddish-brown hair that Kyuhyun automatically knew wasn’t real. In his hands, he carried a big pile of books, some manhwas, some novels, and a binder at the bottom. The boy was a bit shorter than Kyuhyun, but he couldn’t be one-hundred-percent sure if he was older or younger than him by his baby face. It seemed like his body needed to catch up with the rest of him.

“That book was mine,” he snarls, reaching for the books in the little boy’s grasp. Then, something that Kyuhyun hadn’t expected happened—the boy handed him most of the books, blushing and stuttering.

“Oh! I-I’m so sorry…I knew I shouldn’t have taken them, you just looked uncertain and I really, really wanted to finish reading the series this weekend…” He continues off and Kyuhyun blocks it off, looking at the almost-new books that now sit in his hands. Score!

“Thanks,” Kyuhyun mumbles. The little boy smiles and reaches up, his hand blocking the giggle that leaves his lips.

“I’m Kim Ryeowook, by the way.” The little boy tries to free his hand to shake, but in the end almost tips over, and just nods at him instead. Kyuhyun nods, “Cho Kyuhyun.”

Ryeowook or little boy as Kyuhyun has found a liking to call him now, seemed to like this answer, and smiled brightly. “I would love to be friends with you, Cho Kyuhyun-sshi.”

Kyuhyun is taken aback (he hasn’t really been accepted into the ‘cliques’ just yet and this invitation is rather odd) by this sudden friend invite, and he isn’t sure how to respond seeing as he has just learnt of this Kim Ryeowook character who seems to like manhwas and seems pretty cool, even if he looks like he’s too young for his age.

“Yeah, that’d be great,” Kyuhyun says, and Ryeowook jumps up. Surprisingly, the books don’t fall off or anything.

They move to a table, where silently, they disclose their likes, dislikes, characters in the manhwas that seriously need to die, and favourite movies. It’s this day that Kyuhyun learns that Ryeowook hates horror movies (or horror in general), and Kyuhyun laughs a tad under his breath.

“You’ll love Jongwoon,” Ryeowook says, and Kyuhyun leans in, confused.

“Jongwoon?”

-

Kyuhyun grumbles when his parents ask him what he is going to be doing this weekend. Honestly, he had to finish some report for science, and if he didn’t, then he was sure Mr. Kim would be more than willing to kill him. He wasn’t doing that well in science, but each time that his parents brought it up, Kyuhyun would reply with the truth: he hated the teacher, the teacher hated him, and when the teacher was wrong and not up to date, one had to fight against the lesson.

Instead of finishing his report that weekend, he shrugs. “I think I’ll be going to Jongwoon’s place, again. It depends on if they’re free.” His sister tries to hide her laughter by eating some more rice, but Kyuhyun catches her and rolls his eyes, wanting to grab her chopsticks and fling them at her like how he did back when they were younger “and wilder” as relatives said.

“I’m really happy that you’ve found such nice friends in such a short amount of time,” his mother comments. Like that’s supposed to raise my mood, Kyuhyun thinks. His parents always hinted that he was a little anti-social, but whenever his parents talked about it, he would pull out his ‘I’m not anti-social, I just hate you’ t-shirt from his closet and wear it the next day to prove a point.

His father nods and it sickens him. Thanks, pops.

“And you guys seem to get along quite well! Is this the third week you’re spending at least one day together? That must mean that they like you,” his father comments, and Kyuhyun rolls his eyes. Now even a whole boatload of kimchi wouldn’t make his food taste good.

Ahra rolled her eyes, poking at her food, “They’re all a bunch of nerds, anyways.”

His parents laughed and Kyuhyun expertly excused himself from the table, putting his dishes away in the dishwasher and climbing the steps to his room. He grabs his computer. Might as well finish that science report, then.

-

His first expression of Jongwoon was of a much calmer, laid-back individual. And for the most of it, he was correct. Jongwoon was two years older and it showed in his course load, but he had the life of a sophomore with the amount of tweets he tweeted every day, and his love for animals, which happened to be even bigger than Ryeowook’s—which by this time, Kyuhyun had decided was impossible.

“Are we going to your place tomorrow for a movie?” Kyuhyun asks over lunch. They don’t sit in the cafeteria like everyone else; they have found a secluded corner where they won’t be attacked during lunchtime. It’s just the two of them today—Ryeowook is somehow busy with thousands of clubs during the year—and Kyuhyun finds the quietness surprisingly refreshing. It’s usually the three of them, but Jongwoon is lively enough to be just one.

Jongwoon shrugs, “I haven’t gotten a yes or a no from Wookie, yet.”

Kyuhyun nods, ignoring the silly nickname that Jongwoon had picked for Ryeowook, and had been trying to persuade Kyuhyun to use, too. “If not, then you could just come over to my place and play video games.” Jongwoon smiles at the hidden meaning. After getting bored of playing multiplayer games on Kyuhyun’s console, they had turned to porn—playing video games was now code for watching porn.

“I got a pretty nice game last night, too. I’ve been waiting to watch it.” They both smile at the crudeness of it all. They’ve both decided to never watch it with Ryeowook, both thinking that he would be, for one, too frail, and two, they hadn’t really considered him to be the porn-watching type. If there was a type, of course.

“I’m happy that you’ve gotten so close, really,” Jongwoon says, “It doesn’t seem like it’s been that long.” Kyuhyun takes another bite of his food.

“It’s been roughly a month; we just have a lot of free time on our hands. Well, most of us.” Jongwoon nods at Kyuhyun’s explanation—it makes sense. They typically finished their work in class, and so they didn’t have any work to do at home, so inviting people was easy. Jongwoon was still in his last year, though, and so most nights he spent in cram school and Kyuhyun would be forced to spend a night alone, with his parents or Ryeowook.

Neither of them sounded interesting. Ryeowook was undeniably the light that brought a smile to his face even when he didn’t feel like getting out of his sheets in the morning, but Jongwoon was old, mature, and he could easily chat with him any time, any place.

“I’m going to find Ryeowook and ask, k?” Kyuhyun says. Jongwoon nods, and watches him as he packs up his lunch, and heads towards the library. He doesn’t follow and Kyuhyun isn’t surprised. Their relationship is based on small goodbyes and body language.

The library is packed, as per usual, with kids trying to finish last minute assignments in the small amount of time they have to complete them. Kyuhyun smiles at kids that he remembers from various classes, too curious not to check to see which paper they were currently trying to finish. He strolled by nonchalantly, his fingers tapping the phone in his pockets. He scanned the library, and eventually found the purple-red mop of hair, and walked down casually.

“Hey Ryeowook,” Kyuhyun says, giving him a small wave. He registers that there’s a boy that he’s sitting across from, and there are posters on the table, probably to advertise some spirit day or way of life to follow across the school. He doesn’t spend the time to read them when they’ll be up any day now, anyways.

“Oh hey Kyuhyunnie,” Ryeowook says back. He gestures towards the person across from him, and Kyuhyun finally gets a good look at him. He has black hair that is styled in a swoop, much like Jongwoon’s but the colour is lighter, and has just the thin trace of eyeliner. Kyuhyun notices that he has longer eyelashes and a pretty smile. “This is Lee Sungmin.”

“Cho Kyuhyun,” he says, bowing. “Pleased to meet you.” Ryeowook rolls his eyes at his politeness, hitting his arm.

“He’s not this nice, typically. He screamed at me, recently! He’s such a spoiled brat,” Ryeowook’s list of complaints only seems to grow, and Kyuhyun rolls his eyes. Once the seventy-three thousand things that Ryeowook hates about Kyuhyun are over, Ryeowook turns from Sungmin to smile at Kyuhyun. “So, what’s up?”

“Are you still on for the movie this weekend at Jongwoon’s? He said you didn’t really give him an answer, yet,” Kyuhyun said, deciding that that was the exact reason as to why he had come to the library, and when he was done, he would return to Jongwoon, or go to class and finish some work. Maybe get that science homework half-way done.

Ryeowook nodded, “Yep! Hopefully the movie isn’t that scary this time.”

Sungmin’s eyes grew wide. “Can I come?”

Kyuhyun and Ryeowook turned to Sungmin slowly. This was not something they were used to. Their movie nights were strictly Jongwoon, Kyuhyun and Ryeowook, something that they had started a month ago with animes and now horror films. They hadn’t even thought of other people coming to watch the movies with them. And now this guy wanted to come?

Sungmin seemed to notice his mistake and leaned back. “Oh, I’m sorry. I didn’t think it would strike such a cord with you guys.”

Ryeowook shook his head, putting his hand on Sungmin’s. “We would love to have you, wouldn’t we, Kyuhyun? And Jongwoon doesn’t care just if you don’t ruin his carpet or anything, ‘cause he hates cleaning. And the sofa is big enough, ain’t it? We’ll just need to squeeze in a little bit more.” They share a smile before Ryeowook turns to Kyuhyun. “Which film are we watching?”

“I wanted to watch Poltergeist…” Kyuhyun mumbled. The movie store had roughly seventeen copies at the moment.

“I love that movie!” Sungmin squeals. That seems to seal the deal, then.

“Then it’s settled. I’ll text you Jongwoon’s place. Seven-thirty works?”

Kyuhyun has a hard time explaining to Jongwoon how it came about that they have a new member of their weekend-night trio. After three tries, he still doesn’t understand.

Honestly, nor does Kyuhyun.

-

And here they are, watching the newest movie. It was filmed in the 70’s and so the quality of the effects aren’t that special at all, but even with the fake green slime and the cheesy fog, Ryeowook is jumping out of his seat. So much that Kyuhyun is sure that he’d be afraid of Ghostbusters, too. Thankfully, he isn’t sitting beside Ryeowook, and the bowl of popcorn sits on Jongwoon’s lap.

That time, Kyuhyun had made sure not to sit beside Ryeowook and ends up sitting on the end, beside Sungmin. He was the first one to arrive, chatting up with Jongwoon in the basement when Kyuhyun had arrived, and the three of them talked before Ryeowook arrived. From the ten minutes of useless talk, Kyuhyun knew that like Jongwoon, Sungmin had a younger brother, was in ten thousand school clubs and was the vice president for his homeroom, too. They were learning about Jongwoon’s current chore woes when Ryeowook popped in and they started up the movie.

“Oh shit, oh shit!” Ryeowook screams, grabbing onto Jongwoon’s arm as the little girl’s voice goes through the television screen. “They’re all insane. A girl cannot be stuck in a television.” No one speaks; their eyes are glued to the screen, watching as the investigators listen to the voice that resounds through the new house.

“Mommy, Mommy?” the voice asks and Ryeowook screams, clutching Jongwoon’s arm with all his might, and Kyuhyun briefly wonders if he’s blocking the circulation in the older man’s arm. He doubts Ryeowook can be that strong—but there were rumours of what Ryeowook used to be like in elementary school so you could never be sure.

Sungmin laughs, reaching for the remote control. “I gotta pee. Plus, it seems like Ryeowook needs a break for a few minutes.” He presses stop, just when there is a close-up of the television screen, and Ryeowook hides underneath the blanket that drapes over their knees.

Jongwoon agrees. “I need some refreshments, too, anyways. Kyuhyun, would you mind helping me?” Kyuhyun shakes his head; no, of course not. Jongwoon smiles and they all get up, except for Ryeowook, who stares at the television. Sungmin chuckles and pats his shoulder comfortingly.

“So,” Jongwoon drawls, watching as Sungmin sneaks into the powder room, “How is this ‘Sungmin’ character?”

Kyuhyun shrugs, “How would I know?”

“You have been sitting beside him for a quarter of the movie,” Jongwoon comments, rolling his eyes at their progress. There were breaks, when they couldn’t even watch the movie because of how loud Ryeowook was screaming, or maybe Jongwoon’s parents or little brother had come down to check up on them, but now they seemed to have locked themselves in their rooms, or had gone out, for the house was eerily quiet.

“He jumps often, but it isn’t like how Ryeowook jumps. Nor does he claw at my arm.” Jongwoon rolls his eyes and hits Kyuhyun’s arm. They grab some bags of chips, having finished the popcorn (four mouths get through food faster than three) and Jongwoon throws two cans of pop at Kyuhyun that he barely catches.

“I guess I’m still on bowl duty, then?” Jongwoon asks.

“Do you want to clean up if Ryeowook spills, again?” Kyuhyun asks. The question answers itself.

“Ooh, my favourite,” Sungmin swoops in, grabbing the bag from Jongwoon’s hand and digging his hand inside, pulling out a handful of chips. He winks, chewing them up before asking, “So, are we gonna go see if he’s still ok?” Kyuhyun decides that ‘he’ must be Ryeowook, and nods, but realizes that Jongwoon has already started walking back down to the basement, pop cans in his sweater pockets.

“Do you need any help?” Sungmin asks, only carrying the stolen chips bag, whilst Kyuhyun is carrying two—and two pop cans. Kyuhyun nods sheepishly, handing over one soda can.

“I can manage the rest,” Kyuhyun says when Sungmin looks at him again. The ravenette nods and smiles shyly, and waits for Kyuhyun to start walking before he joins him, walking to the door that leads down to the furnished basement.

Jongwoon has already settled down on the couch beside Ryeowook. He raised an eyebrow when Kyuhyun entered, shortly followed by Sungmin. Ryeowook seemed to be happy to see his friend, beckoning Sungmin over, and the ravenette was eager to walk over, sitting down on the couch and patting his knee comfortingly.

“The movie gets less scary, ok?” Sungmin promises and Kyuhyun is reminded of when he was little, when Ahra used to explain to him about those monsters under the bed.

Kyuhyun takes slow steps to the couch, setting the refreshments down on the coffee table. Ryeowook and Sungmin dive for them like vultures, and Kyuhyun is glad that he chose the drink that he wanted first before, sipping on it casually as Jongwoon finds the remote again and presses play. The movie starts up again and Ryeowook whimpers.

Kyuhyun decides to watch Sungmin, now interested by Jongwoon’s words. It’s not like he hasn’t seen the movie anyways. He looks older, maybe Ryeowook’s age or older? That was one of the things that he hadn’t been able to catch when they were talking earlier. He could be a junior, from the looks of it. Ryeowook did look a little bit younger.

Sungmin also had habits. He had a habit to laugh at the worst times—the mirror scene with one of the investigators and his face being ripped in the mirror, or when the daughter mentions the Holiday Inn, or when either the father or the mother ends up in the sludge that was supposed to become their pool, eventually. Ryeowook seems to find this even scarier, as if he doesn’t realize that the soft chuckling is not coming from the screen, but actually from the guy that sits right beside him.

Also, and this is a big one because Kyuhyun sits beside him, he notices how much of a hog Sungmin can be with the covers, pulling at the sides. He sits cross-legged to make sure that all of his lower-half is covered with the blanket, and Kyuhyun notices soon enough that Sungmin has taken almost three-quarters of his share of the blanket. He’s honestly tempted to point this out—“I want my blanket back!”—but Jongwoon seems to be having a nice time, and Kyuhyun does not want to interrupt a movie for such a silly thing like a blanket.

“The boss is mean,” is all that Ryeowook says about the movie when it has finally finished. As if on cue, Sungmin laughs. This time, Jongwoon joins in.

“But guess what! You finally finished a horror film!” Jongwoon says excitedly. A small smile appears on Ryeowook’s face.

“Yeah! I did!” Ryeowook gets up and dances around proudly, and everyone laughs at him, giving him applause when he bows down in front of them. They decide that next week they’ll watch another movie—they only have a week until Halloween, so they’ll have to bump it up, and this time, because Jongwoon’s parents are hosting a party, it will be hosted at Sungmin’s.

-

Kyuhyun is the first one there.

Ryeowook had explained that he had a few arrangements he had to go to before he could go to Sungmin’s, but he promises that he’ll be at the party before eight, so no one is that pressured to get to Sungmin’s house on time. But Kyuhyun’s family had been a pain (Ahra was complaining about the music department yet again and Kyuhyun was done with this bull) so he decided to just lie and go early.

Sungmin’s shocked when he opens the door, but it quickly melts away to happiness. “Welcome! Come in!” Kyuhyun walks in, slipping off his shoes at the doorway and following Sungmin. His hair is wet and the hair in the back sticks to his nape. He smells like lavender and the only way Kyuhyun knows this is because of the tightness of Sungmin’s kitchen. Sungmin’s home isn’t as big as Kyuhyun’s, nor is it bigger than Jongwoon’s. It’s almost claustrophobic, actually.

“Sungjin’s with some of his friends, so he won’t be home until late,” he explains, opening up a cupboard and stepping up on his tippy-toes so that he can fetch some glasses. “I only have the 2L pop bottles, sorry.” He blushes, opening the 2L Coca-Cola and pouring equal amounts in each glass. In the last one, he leans to lick some of the bubbles that appear at the top, licking his lips and humming.

Kyuhyun accepts the cup graciously, sipping on it. It’s too early to gulp, he thinks. The others haven’t arrived, and Jongwoon probably won’t appear at the door until five minutes to, especially with his work load. That means there’s ten minutes. Ten minutes of Lee Sungmin.

“I’m sorry for asking this, but what’s your age? I didn’t know so I automatically assumed that you were the same year as Ryeowook, but you look a little bit older.” Kyuhyun tries to mask his nervousness by taking another sip of the coke. Sungmin laughs and Kyuhyun wonders how someone can laugh so much.

“I’m a junior. Thanks—everyone wants to be told that they look old.” At least he has some sense of humour, Kyuhyun thinks, remembering Jongwoon’s flabbergasted expression when he asked him his age for the first time.

Sungmin leans against the counter, his arm poised to take another drink. “Why don’t you use formal language, Kyuhyun-ah?” Kyuhyun looks up from his cup, confused. Sungmin cocks his head to the side, his bangs falling into his eyes. This is one of the first times that Kyuhyun has seen the older boy without eyeliner, and honestly, Kyuhyun does not know which version he prefers.

Kyuhyun shrugs, “I have an older sister, and I didn’t call her noona or anything when I was younger. I did the same with the older kids at my elementary school. It’s a habit, I guess. Ryeowook and Jongwoon have gotten used to it by now.” Sungmin nods, accepting the answer.

“Your turn,” he says, and Kyuhyun formulates a question.

“Why do you wear so much eyeliner?”

Sungmin smiles, “It’s because men like you have a higher tendency to stare at me if I’m wearing eyeliner.” He winks, and before Kyuhyun can reply—“I honestly wasn’t staring at you!”—but the doorbell rings and Kyuhyun realizes that Jongwoon actually came ten minutes before, not five, like he had predicted.

The movie isn’t that scary and even Ryeowook recognizes this fact when the movie is over. Sungmin shrugs, turns on the television, and they watch a k-drama that’s half-way through its season, pretending like they actually know what’s going on in the story. Kyuhyun and Sungmin chat lazily about the character’s decisions whilst waiting for Kyuhyun’s dad to pick him up, they both love dramas.

“We should watch one sometime,” Sungmin says, “I enjoy these. And I don’t think Ryeowook or Jongwoon-hyung do that much.”

Kyuhyun shakes his head. Jongwoon was much more interested in foreign films. He knew because he followed Jongwoon’s twitter and every tweet was a movie that he wished to watch. Ryeowook was a bit of a fan, but he wasn’t sitting on the edge of his seat like Sungmin appeared to be.

“That would be cool, seeing as these movie nights are over, now that Halloween is on Wednesday,” Kyuhyun said, and Sungmin’s smile seemed to shine brighter than the full moon that evening.

October came to a slow close, and things became drastically cold when Halloween rolled around. Since Ahra had decided to go partying with some friends, Kyuhyun had been given chocolate duty (just in case). In the end, Shim Changmin, appeared at his doorstep, and they ate all the candy themselves.

And Ryeowook still got scared when Kyuhyun dressed up as a test subject for Aperture Science Enrichment Center. Kyuhyun still doesn’t know why it was scary.

-

November – My World is on Fire, How About Yours?

They meet up to watch a drama. Kyuhyun isn’t one-hundred-percent sure how it happens, but it’s one night when Kyuhyun is bored and Sungmin is bored and they’re chatting up on twitter lazily. Jongwoon is finishing an assignment for one of his classes and Ryeowook is out of town so they have no one else to talk to. Sungmin is like Kyuhyun. Sure, Sungmin involves himself in a lot of clubs compared to Kyuhyun, but he finishes his work quickly, and once he’s finished with helping with the chores and getting care of his younger brother, there’s nothing for him to do. This is when he pulls out his phone. Kyuhyun replies and their chat grows steadily.

Sungmin : I’m bored
Kyuhyun : Homework?
Sungmin : Finished it all. You?
Kyuhyun : Same
Sungmin : Wanna come over?
Kyuhyun : Is this some type of booty-call?
Sungmin : keke. Nah just bored. And you’re bored too, yes?
Sungmin : We can watch dramas?
Kyuhyun : Get the TV ready. I’m headed over.

Kyuhyun jogs over in the brisk, late autumn air. This year it’s much colder than last year, and if he remembers well enough, he’s sure that it was just last week that the clocks rolled back. The nights are dark because of it, and Kyuhyun sticks to the lit up pathways to not get caught up in the dark. He hears dogs bark in the background; his hands pale and sickly from the cold as he walks up the steps to Sungmin’s door.

His house seems roomier now than before, and he finds himself at home. After the weekly horror films ended at Jongwoon’s house, Kyuhyun had found himself spending more time with Sungmin. It didn’t happen on purpose, of course, but it seemed like it was just the two of them that ever had any time, now that Jongwoon was trying to keep his grades up and Ryeowook was always preoccupied. The junior didn’t seem to have any of these problems, and so they would call or text the other, setting up plans to ruin each other’s boredom.

“Are we on the seventh episode, by now?” Sungmin asks when Kyuhyun enters the living room. If Sungjin is home, he’s extremely quiet, and Kyuhyun is surprised to see them using the family room’s television instead of how they typically did it, by retreating to Sungmin’s room. He had a decent-sized screen and they could both sit on the bed peacefully whilst watching the drama with a bowl of popcorn on their laps. This time it’s chips and soda.

Kyuhyun nods, settling down on the sofa beside Sungmin. The drama is stupid and Kyuhyun wants to kill off the lead male’s fiancée (seriously, she’s a bitch) already, but none of them have had the willpower to change onto a new one, plus Ahra has most of their family’s dramas, and would never allow Kyuhyun to even look at most of them, so they’ll deal with the few that Sungmin owns.

“She seriously needs to die,” Kyuhyun mumbles when the fiancée winks, her lips dangerously close to the other’s lips. Sungmin laughs.

“That isn’t very nice.”

Kyuhyun rolls his eyes, gesturing at the screen. “She’s already tried to kill the main character! And now she’s threatening his job if he doesn’t stop hanging around her! Like gosh, if you didn’t like her so much, you didn’t have to go so far. Hyejung should get Woosung and they should just disappear forever and leave that bitch Hana behind.”

Sungmin laughs behind his palm, his eyes bright and his giggles short. Kyuhyun doesn’t particularly like Sungmin’s laugh—but anything is better than the things his old babysitter, Jungsoo used to spill out—but the way that he covers his mouth is cute, or how his eyes turn up like half-moons in the dark sky.

“I didn’t think you get so attached,” Sungmin jokes, and Kyuhyun rolls his eyes, crossing his arms across his chest. His lips turn into a thin scowl, trying his best to concentrate on the story at hand, but it’s currently just Hyejung’s little brother and his girlfriend: characters that Kyuhyun has deemed useless to the plot.

“It’s okay Kyuhyun-ah~” Sungmin coos, grabbing onto Kyuhyun’s arm and shaking it back and forth. Kyuhyun tries to keep the frown on his face, but Sungmin starts singing some old trot song about being happy, and Kyuhyun laughs because of the change of pitch. Sungmin claps when Kyuhyun laughs, raising the volume of the singing until Kyuhyun starts following along, moving with Sungmin.

Sungmin giggles when the song is over, and the OST of the drama is playing, signaling the end of the episode. “Yikes, we missed part of the episode.” He turns to Kyuhyun, but Kyuhyun shrugs. Sungmin laughs and Sungmin grabs the remote, ready to replay the final seconds of the episode.

The doorbell rings before Sungmin presses the button. He gets up and checks the door. Ahra is standing on the other side, her hands in her jean pockets, waving shyly at Sungmin. Kyuhyun gets the message and gets his stuff, nodding goodbye to Sungmin before exiting the house and hopping into Ahra’s car.

She looks tired and Kyuhyun remembers that she went to her boyfriend’s house that night. By her expression, Kyuhyun knows that it’s best not to ask.

They’re driving up their street when the silence finally breaks. “You look happier these days, you know?”

Kyuhyun blinks. “How so?”

Ahra laughs awkwardly and brushes a lock of hair behind her ear. “You looked like a loner before, I guess? I thought that you were going to be screwed when you entered high school. But those three guys, Ryeowook, Jongwoon and Sungmin? They’ve opened you up. Kyuhyun-ah, you’re doing just fine.” She gives him a thumbs-up and things seem okay, for now.

They pull up and Ahra sets his hand down on his knee. “And we’re here for you.” Kyuhyun wonders what cheesy film he’s entered (it is almost Christmas, he thinks) but smiles anyways, nodding.

“Thank you.”

-

November is a quick month. It’s a nail-biting month with Christmas right around the corner, and that winter exams are also bound to arrive anytime now, too. Kyuhyun keeps up his grades, and soon finds himself having less and less time to spend watching dramas with Sungmin because of it. He always texts ‘sorry’ when he can’t make it that night or when he really needs to study. Sungmin seems to understand—he is a junior, after all.

And so, woefully, November closes without that much interaction from any of them. Kyuhyun plans a day where they will meet up and have a day to catch up, and they will just enjoy the day. Everyone seems to enjoy this idea; even Jongwoon, who mumbled something about universities and forms and not having time anymore. Kyuhyun just hoped that Jongwoon would enjoy it either way.

-

December – Under the Mistletoe

“Oh my god, I love this park!” Ryeowook cheers when they arrive at the park. It’s one of the bigger ones in Seoul and Kyuhyun remembers the times that his parents would bring him here. It looks beautiful now, trees adorned with snow, its branches icy and cold to the touch. Even if it’s this cold, Ryeowook practically radiates sunlight, and Kyuhyun realizes that this was what he missed.

“Just don’t slip and fall,” Jongwoon advises, grabbing onto Ryeowook’s hand as he’s about to step onto an icy patch in the road. Ryeowook blushes and slaps Jongwoon’s arm. The eldest turns to Kyuhyun and Sungmin. “I’ll go rent a little car for us. You guys can go get some coffee.” He heads off to the office, and Ryeowook skips along after him.

Kyuhyun and Sungmin decide to go get coffee, finding a small vending machine near the office and ordering four different kinds of brew. Sungmin takes the lightest one and keeps it for Ryeowook, who doesn’t enjoy coffee, and Kyuhyun keeps the darkest brew for Jongwoon, who lives off of the drink. Sungmin goes for the second heaviest, Kyuhyun the second weakest.

“It isn’t too warm?” Kyuhyun asks, for he knows that the machines have a habit of burning one’s tongue. Sungmin shakes his head and smiles, leaning against the brick wall. Kyuhyun follows him, sipping on his coffee slowly.

“They’ve certainly come along, haven’t they?” Sungmin asked. Kyuhyun raises an eyebrow.

“Who?”

Sungmin rolls his eyes, “Jongwoon and Ryeowook, of course! Haven’t you seen how clingy Ryeowook is right now?” Kyuhyun has noticed, but had been with them for so long (ok, it was just three months, but for some strange reason, it felt longer) he was used to Ryeowook’s zealous attitude. Wasn’t this how Ryeowook was like on a daily basis?

“Are you saying that they’re…” Kyuhyun was afraid to say the word out in public. Of course there was a chance. Ryeowook was very feminine, when Kyuhyun thought about him—and he could cook. Kyuhyun remembered the lunches that Ryeowook would pack a lunch for Jongwoon if he didn’t have anything to do. And Ryeowook’s texts to Jongwoon, the ones that Kyuhyun had managed to glance at over Jongwoon’s shoulder, were filled with hearts and emoticons. Maybe?

Sungmin nodded slowly. He stopped, looking at Kyuhyun with wide eyes. “You aren’t homophobic, are you? If you are, I’m sorry—but I don’t want all my years of work to go to waste because of a crude remark.”

Kyuhyun rapidly raised his hands up in defense. “No! It’s their business, not mine. If they are like that, then that’s fine. It’s perfectly ok with me.” Sungmin seems to like this answer, for he leans back and relaxes. He waves when Jongwoon and Ryeowook reappear, jangling the car keys.

“Well, where have you planned for us to go, Kyuhyun-ah?”

-

They arrive at a snow-covered hill and Kyuhyun reaches into his bag, finding a blanket and laying it down on the cold earth. Jongwoon and Ryeowook sip their coffees, idly chatting about course load and the times. Kyuhyun and Sungmin sit off to the side, as Sungmin has already told him not to ruin his years’ worth of work.

“So, how did you get into this type of work?” Kyuhyun jokes. Sungmin brushes a hair behind his ear. He hasn’t had a haircut recently and the wisps of his long hair curl around his ear.

Sungmin chuckles, “I guess personal experiences wanted me to? They look cute together, don’t they?”

Kyuhyun hums. He guessed that they looked cute. He could never really tell, though, seeing as he wasn’t really in that kind of department. “So, now that this match-making case is almost closed, are you going to work on your love life, now?”

Sungmin smiled, looking down at his lap. “I don’t believe they like me that way, Kyuhyun-ah.”

“And why not? You could just go up and ask like how people do it in the movies. You are a matchmaker, so it should be easy, right? Or do you want me to help?” Kyuhyun asks.

Sungmin’s smile grows and looks up from his lap to smile at Kyuhyun. “No Kyuhyun-ah, I think I’ll be fine by myself.”

“I’m hungry,” Ryeowook complains, interrupting their conversation. Kyuhyun rolls his eyes and starts unpacking the lunch he had made for the rest of the group.

-

The day is slow and peaceful and everyone agrees that it was undoubtedly what they needed. The food is a little bit cold, but they grab some cupcakes on the way back home. Ryeowook drops Sungmin off and Kyuhyun and Jongwoon walk home, because their homes aren’t that far away from each other.

“You’re gone next year?” Kyuhyun asks. It’s not like he hasn’t considered this; he just remembers it now. The corners of Jongwoon’s lips turn up.

“Yeah, but you’ll do fine. You have a good group of friends.” He nods, digging his hands into his pockets. They end up watching some Star Trek episodes and Kyuhyun decides late in the night that it’s easier just to sleepover at his place.

-

Sungmin: Get your ass over here
Kyuhyun: I have homework!
Sungmin: Does it seem like I care? Get your ass over here!

Kyuhyun sighs and saves his work, shrugging on a coat and walking to Sungmin’s place. It’s a week until Christmas break, and Jongwoon is stuck in cram schools, whilst Ryeowook is working on plays and fundraisers. Sungmin keeps clear of these things because of homework, and so there is time where they can’t meet up because one person has work.

“Hello!” Sungmin chirps when Kyuhyun knocks on the door. The first thing that strikes Kyuhyun is that he has blonde hair, something that he wouldn’t have expected Sungmin to do—but it looks so wonderful on him. He’s trying to find some bromantic words he could possibly say when Sungmin wraps his arms around Kyuhyun’s neck, standing on his tippy-toes.

“W-W-What are you doing?” Kyuhyun stammers, unable to step back.

Sungmin smirks, “You told me to go straight up and tell the person, yes?” He leans in and presses their lips together, and suddenly everything makes sense. Everything melts away and it’s nice. “And if you say that you’re not gay you can seriously just jump off a cliff.”

Kyuhyun doesn’t jump off a cliff, though.

-

He’s got a good amount of friends.

Christmas break is filled with cookies and fat and Kyuhyun is sure that he’s gained weight throughout it all. But there’s little-to-no homework involved and Kyuhyun spends most of his time with Jongwoon, Ryeowook and Sungmin.

They settle on the ratted, old and beige couch in Jongwoon’s basement. Ryeowook has his head on Jongwoon’s shoulder and Sungmin’s legs are draped over Kyuhyun’s. They press play and a movie starts.

Kyuhyun smiles and relaxes. He’s fine.

--
end.
a/n: yeah. no.
a/n1: thank you to all the people that encouraged me on and the people that commented (no one, lol). I hope the original prompter who shall stay unnamed enjoyed this!

another booty call

mywookness — Thu, 22 Nov 2012 03:49:22 GMT

Hi everyone!

So, I have a beta for my Super Junior fic (and thank you!) and for my SHINee fic (and thank you!) but I have finished my EXO fic and really need a beta for it. I can't really tell you guys what it's about (because I can't) but the person that betas will be able to read t first, before anyone else! It's shorter too.

Leave a comment with your e-mail if you are willing to beta my EXO fic. Also, if you are willing to beta for 2U (Yunho/Yoochun) or BlockB, please state that!

If I don't get a beta by the 3rd of December, I will be going to a different site. I have almost 400 members. I hope someone can open their heart to read my EXO fic!

viva five/six {yunho/junsu}

mywookness — Sun, 18 Nov 2012 02:09:28 GMT

Title: Viva Chapter Five - Look, you knew that things would turn this way from the start, right?
Fandom: DBSK
Pairings: Yunho-centric, Yunho/Junsu, Yunho/Stephanie
Rating: PG-13
Warnings: crude language
Genre: Fluff, Romance, Humour
A/N: written for yjjyc More notes at the end.
Summary: Jung Yunho is a rich, polite, perfect man. Kim Jaejoong is his obnoxious, and gay, best friend. Kim Junsu is a sultry, sexy and seductive man, that Yunho meets when Jaejoong brings him to a gay bar. Romance and humour ensues.

One - We Will Go Again
Two - I Shook my Head at All the Questions Inside of Me
Three - I’ll bask in the joy of this victory for a moment
Four - I have no idea what's going on

Three weeks of flat-out torture, that’s what it was exactly. Now Junsu had a reason to come over to Jaejoong and Jung Yunho’s shared apartment whenever he wanted, and Jaejoong would never turn him down when Junsu appeared at their door. Some nights he would just follow Jaejoong out of the office and slide in the backseat beside Jaejoong—Yunho would drive them home with a scowl pasted on his lips. Some nights when Jaejoong was working from home or was sick, Junsu would slide into the passenger seat and would play with the knobs as Yunho obediently drives him home. There is barely any conversation.

Yunho usually hides himself in his office these nights, only escaping out when his dinner arrives (usually black bean noodles because it’s cheap and he feels cheap), and does his work. Sometimes Yoochun arrives and pulls him out of his office, Jaejoong and Junsu laughing from the living room, and he has to hang around drunk Changmin and smoking Yoochun for the most of the night in a karaoke room. He isn’t an alcoholic but the women that serve them in at the karaoke rooms must think he is because of the amount of alcohol he consumes when he hangs around Changmin and Yoochun. Jaejoong is usually the one that tells him to stop—but hey, it doesn’t look like he’s here, does it?

Bokyung, his wonderful girlfriend, has started her ballet, and for most of the month her nights are controlled by her director’s. One night she’ll be ok with going out and the next she can’t because she really, really has to go perform that night. It will be just a little bit longer, she promises, and so Yunho waits with a smile, calling the restaurant to cancel their reservation before ordering some more black bean noodles.

“Hey Yunho,” Junsu says with a smirk, sliding into the car beside him. Jaejoong is in Jeju Island working from their Jeju offices. Yunho had been wishing for work to be over since that morning because of this—Bokyung would be able to come over that night, and they would spend the night just chilling and watching movies from Yunho’s collection. In this plan, he hadn’t expected Junsu to somehow interject himself in.

“Jaejoong is in Jeju, you should know that,” Yunho explains, unlocking the doors and shooting Junsu a look. When Junsu buckles up his seatbelt, Yunho unbuckles it, reaching over and swinging the door over. The smell of car park slithers into the car and Yunho breathes it in proudly—it’s one of the underground scents of success. “And he won’t be home for another few days, so you should just catch a taxi or something home.”

Junsu rolls his eyes, and with his right hand, he closes the car door. He turns to Yunho with a pout, brushing his blonde bangs out of his eyes. The brown roots are quickly spreading through his hair—if Junsu wants to keep the blonde hair, he should dye it blonde again. But Yunho somehow gets the feeling that he has been doing this on purpose, watching as Yunho fidgets over one of his pet peeves. He had almost dragged Jaejoong into the bathroom once when he h got highlights. He’s been a redhead since.

“Can you drive me home, Mr. Jung? I forgot my metro pass at home today. I know that Jaejoong isn’t here today, but I honestly forgot about getting home. Plus you have time before you have to meet up with my sister,” Junsu wiggles his eyebrows and Yunho looks away. He turns the key in the ignition and takes the car into drive.

“You know, it’s really scary when you call Bokyung your sister,” Yunho says, driving around the parking garage and trying to find the exit, like he did every day. Gear shift and look at the mirror, these things were so subconscious and robotic to him by now. Driving cars for Yunho was nothing, nor was his car anything special and he tried his best to get Jaejoong from buying something stupidly expensive that they would rarely drive. Yoochun’s Ferrari smiled at them as they drove by.

Junsu smirks, “Well, she is my sister. And we share everything about our love lives together. Is it really true that you haven’t had sex yet? I’m really disappointed Jung Yunho.” He shakes his head as Yunho eases down a ramp, down on the last level of the parking garage, about to enter the light. He slips his card into the machine and it spits out his receipt.

“I’m not talking about my sex life with you, thank you very much,” Yunho says, grabbing his receipt and throwing it onto the dashboard. Junsu chuckles under his breath and Yunho side-glances him, trying his best to concentrate on the rush hour traffic of downtown Seoul. “And honestly, I would enjoy it if you stopped talking to my girlfriend about our relationship, thank you.”

“Isn’t that what you talk to Jaejoong about?” Junsu purrs, raising an eyebrow when Yunho glances over at him when they reach an intersection, the bright red of the traffic light reflected on the sleek black of the hood. When Yunho doesn’t reply, Junsu continues, meshing his fingers together and sitting conservatively in the passenger seat. “I’ve heard many times from Jaejoong that you must be wishing to have sex, he can literally hear you jacking off.”

“Shut up,” Yunho says and hopes that Junsu can’t see how red his cheeks have become. In the blurry of night lights and rain that hits the windshield; Yunho can see how closely Bokyung and Junsu really do look alike. Most nights when Bokyung is dancing and when Junsu has finally gone home, Yunho will turn on the shower and press his forehead to the tile wall. Somewhere in between Bokyung’s face meshes into Junsu’s.

“You are really gay, aren’t you? You rarely kiss my sister, you haven’t even had sex yet and you’re twenty-six, and you jack off to me,” Junsu lists off, a smirk permanently pulled to his lips, “Honestly, I’m flattered.” He flips his hair and Yunho is tempted to hit his cheek.

Contact. The exact thing that Yunho had tried to have for the past three weeks was the exact thing that Junsu had been lusting over. Yunho had a girlfriend and Junsu had Jaejoong, it was just a big square filled with lines and ties that Yunho was trying not to break. Jaejoong was on edge and always getting in fights with Yunho it seemed—when Jaejoong was mad, Yunho got nervous. Jaejoong was never someone you wanted angry at you.

“Fuck off,” he says, driving up to Junsu’s apartment.

“At least walk me up. Jaejoong does.” Yunho wants to tell him that there’s a reason for that—they are dating after all—but Junsu unbuckles Yunho’s seatbelt and pulls him out of his seat. Yunho makes sure to lock his car before slowly following Junsu. Maybe Bokyung hasn’t left for his place yet and he can just pick her up, like a gentleman. Maybe she’ll find it romantic that he drove her brother home. Sisters did like things like that, right?

“If you are gay, than that’s perfectly fine, you know,” Junsu says, picking at his nails.

“I’m not gay,” Yunho counters, crossing his arms and leaning into the glass walls of the elevator. There just happens to be no one in the elevator but them and Yunho desperately wishes someone was so that their conversation could end. But it was Junsu—there was a chance that he would just continue talking, not caring about who walked on.

“I would be perfectly fine if you did come out,” Junsu says, taking a step closer to Yunho, resting his manicured hand on his shoulder, smiling at how Yunho struggles.

“I’m sure you would,” Yunho swallows. “But you would have to drop Jaejoong first. And I’ve heard that Jaejoong is a terrible ex. That ‘obsessive girlfriend’ meme? Yeah, it was based on Jaejoong.”

“How do you know that I haven’t dropped him yet?” Junsu asks, winking when Yunho finally turns to him awestruck.

“What?” Yunho asks. He replaced it with, “Pardon?”

“Did you wonder why he left for an impromptu visit for Jeju? They don’t need any help there but Jaejoong went anyways for a reason. Do you think this just happened to be? You’re gay Yunho—I’m just here to prove it to you,” Junsu laughed wickedly. The elevator doors opened.

Yunho flees. He rushes to Bokyung’s apartment and knocks as loud as he possibly can. In the corner of his eye, he can see Junsu running towards him. No! No, no, no! This could not be happening. He did not like Junsu at all—he wasn’t gay! But his heartbeat pressed against his ribcage so much that he was afraid that it would break, and when he closed his eyes, he could see the devil smirk—Junsu smirk and press his lips to his earlobe.

“Yunho?” Junsu calls and when he reaches him, the emotions mix and mingle in front of Yunho’s eyes like a kaleidoscope. His sister’s voice rings in his ear and it’s exactly what she told him when Yunho explained military service to her the first time. He reaches out and grabs Junsu’s shoulder, wrapping him in a hug and… it happens.

His lips are just as soft as he has imagined them for over two months, now. They taste like cherries, if possible, and Yunho wonders where he can buy this lip gloss because it’s so delicious. He grips at the back of Junsu’s suit and feels the fabric wrinkle and stretch underneath his grip. He’s shorter but Yunho likes this, likes how he has to move his neck just a little until Junsu stands on his tippy-toes and kisses back. When he kisses back, Yunho knows—paradise.

“Yunho?” Bokyung’s voice echoes in his ear but he isn’t listening for this. He tunes his radio for Junsu’s moans and the sliding of skin. Her voice comes in again and he wishes for a mute—a way to keep her on a separate frequency.

She rips them apart and slaps his face.

“What the fuck, Yunho?” she asks, turning to her brother. “What the fuck, Junsu? You have a boyfriend, don’t you? You have Jaejoong oppa! Why are you going around kissing my boyfriend?”

Yunho sighs, “I kissed him.”

“What the fuck? You’re not gay, Yunho! What the hell is going on?” Unfortunately for the three, a crowd has gathered around in the tight hallway. Bokyung closes the door and Junsu pushes himself in. Yunho stands back. He runs.

**

“Mannnnnnnnnnn,” Yoochun drawls, draping his arm over Yunho’s shoulder, “You look so sad! What’s up, bro?” Yunho shakes his head, downing another drink that tastes a bit like cat pee (Jaejoong’s cats were witches), but in the end he can still taste the cherry on his lips. He knows he’s drunk ‘cause it feels like he’s swimming in alcohol.

“I kissed Junsu!” Yunho complains, slamming his head down onto the counter. “I kissed him right in front of Bokyung!”

“Oh gosh man!” Changmin gasps, ordering him another drink, “That sucks, that really sucks!”

“I know! Bokyung will stop dating me for sure!” Yunho cries, sobbing into his arm.

“But there must have been a reason that you kissed Junsu, right?” Yoochun persists. “If you kissed him that means there was a reason! You were meant to be! And if you kissed in front of Bokyung it was a wise decision—it was a way to get the guy and lose the girl!”

“I guess that makes sense…” Yunho mumbles.

“It does!” Changmin exclaims and jumps up in fights of giggles. He quickly makes do to cover his mouth, trying his best to control the giggles. “I think, that you,” he pokes Yunho; “You should find Junsu and kiss him again! Tell him how you feel!”

Yoochun screams, “Yeah!”

Yunho stands up, almost knocking over the stool he sits on, and smiles to his fellow workers. “Yes! I shall!”

They share a drink and then, Yunho goes out into the wild to find Junsu. Only to realize that he has no idea where to look for him. On any other day he might ask Jaejoong or Bokyung—but he decides that they would not be so happy to get a text from him. So he stretches his legs and back, and in his drunkenness, he starts walking for somewhere in particular. He deems it unsafe to drive his car home.

“Junsu! Junsu!” He turns the corner and finds himself at the gay bar. He stops in his tracks. This is where it all started. This is where all the pain started and the drama and the broken relationships. Damn Kim Jaejoong. He burps and shakes his head before walking up the steps to the gay bar, pushing his way past people to get inside.

Once inside, he fits himself into the throng of dancing people. He feels hands on his body, his butt and his thighs, and he touches them back like a greeting. There are smirks and licking of the lips but none of them are Junsu. None of them are Junsu.

“Junsu!” He screams, hoping that somewhere in Seoul he is able to hear his voice and will follow it. He grabs onto someone’s bicep and lets the hands pass him a drink. He puts the martini glass to his lips when—

“No. Come.” Junsu smashes the glass down and pulls him out. The angel has returned.

--
end.
a/n: smuts to come~ not supposed to sound that gross.
a/n1: updates are usually on sundays. i was just not that busy today.
a/n2: join for faster updates

viva four/six {yunho/junsu}

mywookness — Mon, 12 Nov 2012 02:11:24 GMT

Title: Viva Chapter Four - I don't know what's going on at all
Fandom: DBSK
Pairings: Yunho-centric, Yunho/Junsu, Yunho/Stephanie, Jaejoong/Junsu
Rating: PG-13
Warnings: crude language
Genre: Fluff, Romance, Humour
A/N: written for yjjyc More notes at the end.
Summary: Jung Yunho is a rich, polite, perfect man. Kim Jaejoong is his obnoxious, and gay, best friend. Kim Junsu is a sultry, sexy and seductive man, that Yunho meets when Jaejoong brings him to a gay bar. Romance and humour ensues.

One - We Will Go Again ; Two - I Shook my Head at All the Questions Inside of Me ; Three - I’ll bask in the joy of this victory for a moment

A tilt of the lips, a turn of the spoon and a brush of the hair and Kim Bokyung tries her best not to laugh. They sit across from each other, sharing coffees and smiles. Around them the world buzzes.

“How was America?” he asks, because it is honestly the first thing that comes to mind. He can see the laugh behind his hand before she tucks her hair behind her ear. He likes seeing all her face, he thinks, and he notices the small piercing at the top of her ear, and he wonders if it’s a music note, or it’s something artistic. On her shoulder, when they had walked into the café, he had seen the beginnings of a tattoo running down her back.

Bokyung shrugs her shoulders, “I have family over there and it’s home. A lot of people were sad when they heard that I would be coming home to South Korea. After the final season of the ballet, I told them that I really just wanted to see my parents and my brother and such. So everyone set up a party for me and it was perfect and I really enjoyed it. I really miss them, of course, but a little break from L.A is good for me. Plus, I missed the Seoul Ballet. I don’t get teased for my accent here.”

They laugh. Bokyung sips some of her coffee, looking at Yunho over the rim. “And what’s up with you?”

“I’m still in the same place that I was before, and now Jaejoong is working there so that he can annoy me. We’re still sharing an apartment but now we live in a pricier place. Don’t give me that look, the mold of the old place finally got to me.” Bokyung threw her head back in laughter.

“Ok, yeah, the apartment was pretty bad, now that you think about it. That stove, too!”

Yunho grabbed onto his cup, leaning forwards and feeling the tears of laughter prick at the corners of his eyes. “The stove was terrible! It took an hour for water to boil with that thing! Maybe that’s why Jaejoong ordered so much food when we had that place.”

When they look back, their hands are on top of each other’s.

“Come on, I heard there was a good movie playing. Some book adaptation, I’ve heard. I can pay and still get you home on time by your curfew,” Yunho said, standing up and throwing a few bills onto the table. Bokyung smiles, grabbing her purse and accepting Yunho’s hand when he reaches out, accepting it and walking out of the café.

**

“That girl was a complete and utter idiot,” Bokyung comments, exiting the movie theater with a cup of soda in her hand. Yunho chuckles and enters his car. Bokyung smiles and adjusts the radio. It had been playing a favourite of Jaejoong’s, but now some indie song rolled into Yunho’s ears as he turned the wheel, forcing the car into a smaller street.

“So, where do you live again? I promise it wasn’t supposed to sound that creepy.” Bokyung smirks and rolls her eyes, pointing to a street that slowly appeared in the distance.

“Just drive down there. The apartment’s secret door is easy to find—you can just drop me off.”

“No, I wanna walk you up at least,” Yunho argues, “Can’t let someone like you getting attacked on the way up.” Bokyung rolls her eyes but Yunho knows he’s won when Bokyung smiles just a little bit more.

The elevator is broken so they have to take the stairs. Bokyung slips out of her shoes and smiles bashfully when Yunho notices the art on her toenails. “One of my girlfriends wanted to paint my nails. I had to let her—she was recently getting over a boyfriend.” She shrugs cutely before running up the steps, Yunho slowly trailing behind. He was way too used to elevators by now.

They reach the door, and Bokyung finds her keys from her purse. She opens the door, turning around and smiling sheepishly.

“So, Yunho-oppa,” she begins, turning her body side-to-side.

“Yes, Bokyung-ah?” Yunho replies cutely, and Bokyung bends at the waist, laughing once more. There was always laughter with Bokyung and Yunho honestly liked that.

“Um,” Bokyung continued, tucking a strand of hair behind her ear, “So, seeing as I won’t be leaving Seoul for a while, and I think that you have some time off every few days, so I was wondering if you wanted to go out another time?”

“Are you asking me out on a date?” Yunho asks.

Bokyung shrugs, “You could call it that.”

“I would love that.”

**

“Ooh, I heard that you’re dating my sister~” Junsu says when he places a coffee down in front of Yunho Thursday morning. Yunho grabs the coffee without looking up. Two weeks with Junsu as Jaejoong’s secretary has been torture but thankfully, quick. Hours upon hours of teasing, stripping and coincidental bending, Yunho had almost been able to consult Jaejoong about firing him, but the coffee every morning was a plus.

“Wow you’re late,” Yunho says, “Even Yoochun knew by Tuesday.” Junsu huffs, reaching out to take Yunho’s coffee, but Yunho leans back, a smirk pulled against his lips. Now he looks up to smile at Junsu. His hair is coming back—a deep, dark brown is visible in his roots. He’s wearing some type of light red lipstick; too, it’s obvious by the contrast in Junsu’s cheeks.

“Anyways,” Junsu slides into the chair in front of Yunho’s desk, “Do you want me to do the typical spiel of ‘if you break her heart I will break your jewels?’” Yunho shakes his head. “Good.” He stands up, slipping his hands into his pockets. “And by the way, I’m coming over to your place; Jaejoong invited me over. So you can’t kick me out this time.”

He winks and leaves the room.

“Fuck.”

Jaejoong’s laughter can be heard in the distance.

Dating Bokyung is wonderful. It seriously is. She has a wonderful perfume and a gorgeous laugh and they are very comfortable together. She is really independent, and Yunho hates the nights where he has to go home because Bokyung is doing a practice or hanging out with some friends. Tonight is one of those nights, and unfortunately, Yunho has to go home with Kim Junsu and Kim Jaejoong in his apartment again. Honestly, he’s tempted to kick Jaejoong out so that he can get his own apartment to himself.

He’d be able to have sex, too, that way.

They decide to have some take-out that night, and it sticks to the corners of Yunho’s teeth like caramel. He hates the taste of it but Junsu seems to like it, slurping up the noodles and winking at him whenever Yunho looks at him. They crowd around the table and their knees bump against each other but Yunho has something called pride.

“So, Yunho-ah,” Jaejoong begins, taking a long gulp of his soda. “I wanna tell you something.”

“You aren’t pregnant, are you? No, even better—you’re willing to move out?” Yunho says sarcastically, and winces a tad when Jaejoong slaps his hand.

“No, it is something even better,” Jaejoong smiled through the sarcasm, “I think Junsu and I will start dating now.”

“What?”

Junsu laughed. “We’re a couple.”

Yunho watches with disdain as Junsu grabs Jaejoong’s neck, pulling him over the table and kissing him flat out on the lips.

--
end.
a/n: i had this finished at seven, guys. my sister got in the way. damn sister.
a/n1: i am thirsty. so imma go drink something.
a/n2: updates every sunday or sooner. just two more sundays everybody! (unless epilogues are in order)
a/n2.5: the next chapter will be long. really long. but i promise it will be up on sunday.
a/n3: join for faster updates

beta

mywookness — Mon, 05 Nov 2012 04:16:41 GMT

yo.

I am currently almost-done my Super Junior Secret Santa. And therefore, I am looking for a beta! /claps/

I'm looking for someone that has an understanding on the English language and a basic understanding of the Super Junior fandom. Also, I need this person to be trust-worthy, so that they won't be spilling who wrote such fic when they are posted, because it is a surprise.

If you would like to, please either PM or leave me a comment with your e-mail, and I will get back to you. I seriously just need one.

ALSO.

If you are willing to beta, but don't have a firm grasp of Super Junior, I have four more secret santas - SHINee, 2U (Yoochun/Yunho), EXO and BlockB. If you want to do either of those four, leave a comment mentioning this fact. If you are willing to do Super Junior and more fandoms (yayy~), please leave that as a note, too!

Thank you so much yeobos,

- Je

viva three/six {yunho/junsu}

mywookness — Mon, 05 Nov 2012 03:25:03 GMT

Title: Viva Chapter Three - I’ll bask in the joy of this victory for a moment
Fandom: DBSK
Pairings: Yunho-centric, Yunho/Junsu
Rating: PG-13
Warnings: crude language, wet dreams
Genre: Fluff, Romance, Humour
A/N: written for yjjyc More notes at the end. and forever!troll Jaejoong.
Summary: Jung Yunho is a rich, polite, perfect man. Kim Jaejoong is his obnoxious, and gay, best friend. Kim Junsu is a sultry, sexy and seductive man, that Yunho meets when Jaejoong brings him to a gay bar. Romance and humour ensues.

One - We Will Go Again ; Two - I Shook my Head at All the Questions Inside of Me

Changmin was not happy. Not in the least.

“That is not the proper way to address someone,” Changmin says. Yunho rolls his eyes, his hands clasped in his lap, trying his best to sit as still as possible on the desk. The secretary has already screamed at him for wiggling too much, and he knows from the yearly trips Youngwoon sets up in the office that Changmin has strong muscles and can hit hard.

“Thanks for the ethics class,” Yunho jokes. Changmin taps his shoulder, just enough to make it hurt, and Yunho really wonders where he works out to make his punch hurt that much. The younger finishes dressing the wound and steps away, judging his work. He pulls out his phone from his pocket and shows him his reflection. Good, Yunho can make up some story that he was in a bar fight if need be.

Not slapped in the cheek by a guy not only shorter than him, but with a lower rank.

Jung Yunho had not expected such crude language to escape his mouth when he had realized that the man that was standing in his doorway was none other but Kim Junsu. Honestly. He had been raised to speak nice, kind words to everyone in the work environment. But as honestly as that last comment was, he was not expecting Junsu to be his secretary, either. Honestly.

“Holy fuck, it’s you,” Yunho mumbled. He didn’t register what was happening before he got a rude awakening with Junsu’s fist to his cheek. His knuckles hurt bad, really bad. Then it followed with a slap, and he would have done more damage had Jaejoong not jumped from his spot at the door (he had been watching the whole show unfold, the bastard) and stopped him. The pain still hurt after Youngwoon had told Changmin to patch him up, seeing as Changmin had been the only one to do the ‘medicine in the workplace’ class.

“Thanks. I know you have a lot of work to do and all,” Yunho apologized. Changmin simply rolled his eyes, mumbling something about deadlines and phone calls, leaving Yunho’s office and shutting the door. Yunho leaned down and ran his fingers through his hair, breathing in and out to try to calm himself down before getting back to work. He reviewed all the work he needed to finish by tomorrow in his head. If Jaejoong wasn’t going to be dragging him to any gay bars tonight, he might be able to finish them.

There was a knock on his door and he looked up, noticing Junsu at the door, carrying coffees from the place downstairs. “Jaejoong said that coffee is your friend. I’m sorry,” he said, outstretching the coffee. Yunho reached for it, barely noticing the soft touch they shared, and sipped on the warm drink, smiling when the smell reached his nostrils. He nodded.

“Thanks,” Yunho replied softly, “Coffee is more like my best friend. Jaejoong gets jealous because of that.” They share a short laugh, and Yunho looks up so that their eyes meet. Junsu smiles and cocks his head to the side.

He looks different, Yunho thinks. His eyes don’t have that level of promiscuity, his body doesn’t look that sexy or tight in his outfit, and his cheeks look chubby, even with his beautiful jawline. He looks shy and sheepish in this environment, unlike when they had been inches away from each other at the bar. Yunho is slowly calculating which version of Junsu he prefers whilst they sit in the silence.

“Are you going to fire me?” Junsu asks, like a small child, and Yunho chuckles under his breath. When Jaejoong had pulled him off of him, Yunho had said that he would fire him no matter what. Now, thinking back, he guesses it wasn’t the smartest move.

Yunho sighs, “It’ll probably be distracting if you were my secretary.” Junsu nods and looks down at his coffee that sits in his hands. When he looks up again and smiles at Yunho, he can see the sex in his eyes again.

“That’s wonderful,” Junsu says, taking steps closer and wrapping a fist around his tie, so that his lips are dangerously close to his philtrum, “Because Jaejoong just hired me in case. And we can play as much then.” He places a soft kiss to Yunho’s cheek, winking as he pulls away. Yunho’s cheeks are hot as Junsu lets go and walks away, rotating his hips as he does so.

“Fuck.”

**
“I am trying to work,” Yunho says.

“Come on,” Yoochun whines.

“I am working, Yoochun.”

“I really, really need you!” Yoochun complains, squatting in front of Yunho’s desk. Yunho looks up from underneath his glasses to glare at Yoochun.

“I don’t know why Jaejoong let you inside my house in the first place, but Yoochun, I really need to work. And you should be getting home or something or whatever the hell you do in your free time,” Yunho shoos away, but Yoochun just inches closer, his puppy eyes regarding Yunho until he finally looks back down at Yoochun, flicking his forehead.

“Why aren’t you out there?” Yoochun asks and cocks his head to the side, the beginnings of a smirk appearing on his lips. Yunho seriously wants to throw him out the window of his apartment, but his hands might get dirty in the process, and he seriously needs to finish this, or he will be behind in his work. And from today’s work, he’s already very behind.

“Is it because Junsu is out there?” Yoochun asks, smirking. Yunho looks up and Yoochun laughs.

Yunho had dealt with the giggling for the most of the night, and was worried that his ears were going to burst. Both Junsu and Jaejoong have very distinct laughs, and it rings in his ears, even with the music that he has blasting from his iPod dock. Yoochun’s turned it down by now and Yunho barely registers the Japanese Indie that’s playing, just wisps of the lyrics floating into his eardrums.

“No, but I would prefer some almost peace and quiet. It’s hard enough when Jaejoong is around, let alone Junsu. I’m surprised they aren’t saying mutterings of toil and trouble yet,” Yunho complains, and another wave of cackles sneaks underneath the door. Yoochun laughs but Yunho’s glare stops him. “Honestly, there are karaoke places for things like this. I feel like calling the cops.”

Yoochun grabs Yunho’s shoulder, walking around his desk and saving the work that he was diligently working on. He turns him around in the chair. “If they are bugging you, just go up and speak to them! I’m actually driving Junsu home and Changmin wants me to meet him up for drinks, anyways. You’re allowed to come, if you want.”

Yunho doesn’t even question why Yoochun is already so close to Jaejoong’s secretary, but nods. “Thanks.” He pats Yoochun’s arm and walks to the door, opening it up and entering the open loft. On the couch across the way from Yunho’s office, the two sitting on the couch stop talking. They’re drinking tea and there are open magazines on the table. It’s like a pair of mothers talking about the neighbourhood.

“Kim Junsu-sshi,” Jung Yunho calls, swallowing the lump in his throat that emerges upon saying his name. The dazzling, sultry eyes attach to his own and Yunho rubs his thumb over the other not to look nervous. “I know that it is Friday and that everyone is entailed to their own business on a Friday evening, but we sleep very early, us, and we should be going to sleep as soon as possible. You see, Jaejoong and I do a lot during the weekend and therefore need to be in our top, physical forms.”

It’s a bunch of bullshit, but it seems to work.

“Ok,” Junsu says, flashing him a smile, “I was just about to bring up the time, anyways. Yoochunnie has to see Changmin-ah, yes? It would be mean to keep him any longer. I’ll see you two on Monday. Or maybe earlier?” Jaejoong laughs and Yunho realizes how much he hates inside jokes. Jaejoong gives him a hug, and for Yunho, they stick to an awkward handshake. Yoochun appears out of nowhere and keeps the door open for him, and then they finally walk out the door, leaving Yunho and Jaejoong to their own devices.

“I like him,” Jaejoong says.

“Evidently.”

Jaejoong laughs, standing up and hugging Yunho. There’s a bit of a height difference, but seeing as they were best friends for most of their lifetimes, the height differences and the weight differences weren’t that special anymore. “You sounded pretty mean, though. Firing some guy because of previous engagements? You know that he wouldn’t have flirted with you if he was your secretary. He’s just like you Yunho, when it comes to work. Now you’ll have to deal with the flirting.”

“You didn’t have to hire him as your secretary,” Yunho counters, wiggling to get an arm free so that he can rest it on Jaejoong’s shoulder. They both watch the door, expecting a knock or some activity. Jaejoong hums, digging his face into Yunho’s shirt.

“I hired him because I think he’ll teach you a lot, Yunho-ah,” Jaejoong explains, “And I do hope you learn well.” Yunho closes his eyes. This was just like when Jaejoong had pretended to drown so that Yunho would have to do mouth-to-mouth, therefore practicing for his lifeguarding test. Yunho had slapped his arm, called him an idiot and refused to talk to him for the rest of the week, but Yunho had passed because of it. This sounded similar.

“Just don’t do anything drastic, ok?” Yunho sighs. Jaejoong nods.

“Of course, I just like seeing you squirm once and awhile.”

Yunho had been doing a lot of squirming lately. Hopefully Jaejoong was enjoying it.

**

“Come on Yunho-hyung,” the high voice chirped, his hand running down his bare chest. Lips latched against skin and Yunho bucked, his hands grabbing onto the soft sides, his fingers sliding down to rest on his hips. Yunho moves his head so that their lips touch, slow at first, and then meshing. A hand reaches down and grabs onto his crotch. Yunho groans into the darkness.

When Yunho awakes, he doesn’t want to get out of his sheets.

**

“Ooh, I really need some peppers!” Jaejoong squeals, reaching for the produce. Yunho slaps his hand.

“No, we don’t. We waste so much food already with all the take-out you order on a daily basis. We’re just getting a few thinks today, ok?” Jaejoong rolls his eyes and pouts, but his spirits are lifted when they entered the cereal aisle, picking up his favourite box and placing it into the cart. Yunho could only scoff underneath his breath.

“Yunho-oppa? Jaejoong-oppa, is that you?”

They turn around to see a brunette, long hair and smiling face. Yunho freezes and Jaejoong needs to hit his arm to unfreeze him. The girl smiles and runs over, the contents of her basket almost falling out.

“I knew it was you guys! I’m surprised to see you two still together. How long has it been? A few years, I believe,” the girl goes on, and Yunho finally remembers her name.

“Bokyung? I thought that you were in America, doing ballet,” Yunho asks, his brows furrowed. He remembered the sad night when she admitted that she would be moving to America soon to pursue her dream of dance, leaving Jaejoong and Yunho, who had gotten used to, and quite fond of Bokyung.

The girl blushed. “I came home because of an opening in the Seoul ballet. I may go back to L.A, but right now they need me here, so I’m here!” She chuckles nervously. “I’m staying with my brother, though, so if you two ever want to get caught up or talk, we could chat, yes?”

Jaejoong smiles humbly. “Of course. What’s your brother’s name?”

Bokyung shrugs and brushes a strand of hair behind her hair. “Kim Junsu?”

--
end.
a/n: longer chapter this time, 2k. don't know if this will be the length of the rest of the chapters or not. but half-way, now!
a/n1: adding Bokyung/Stephanie from CSJH-The Grace into the mix! This chapter kind of sucks, though. Brief synopsis: Yunho got Junsu as his secretary, but then got punched by Junsu because of swearing, and then fired him. Jaejoong then hired Junsu, and now, instead of working hard like he would for Yunho - he's going to make his life a living hell. Yay! Junsu and Jaejoong becomes bffs, destroying Yunho in and out of the work place. Yoochun flirts at everything that moves, his recent target is Junsu. Changmin is too smart for this group. Yunho politely asks Junsu to leave, and he learns that Jaejoong hired Junsu to teach him some type of lesson. The next day, whilst grocery shopping, Jaejoong and Yunho meet up with an old friend - who is Junsu's sister. Oh yeah - Yunho gets a wet dream. Yep ~
a/n2: hope that helps.
a/n3: join for faster updates

nine months 2/2 {ga-in/uee}

mywookness — Thu, 01 Nov 2012 02:58:56 GMT

nine months (that i have waited for you in the snow
ga-in/uee
future!au ; r
based on the book matched and the book the giver mixed into one fic ; written for the femmebigbang
part one

part one

Insu stays for the weekend before he has to leave back for the sixth province.

The dinner at home is awkward with my father’s intense glare and my mother’s soft worrying over him. I try to make up for it by taking him out on a walk before curfew, and we walk, hand in hand, down the street and back. His pale skin glimmers under the streetlights, and I blush whenever he turns down and smiles at me. Something with his eyes makes me feel like he’s only looking at me and my heart skips. My health monitor asks if something is wrong and he laughs into the air when I grow redder.

“Yujin-ah, you’re so adorable,” he says, wrapping his arm around my own. I squirm self-consciously, so he adds, “And I really like that.”

The sun has set by now, and nighttime covers us with its cold blanket. Time moves slowly, but summer is coming up soon, and that means more time off, more time with Insu, and I imagine spending weeks on end at his place if parents allow it, or spending days doing summery activities in the third province, where there are mountains and we could go hiking. My hands shake with anticipation.

“You said we needed to talk,” I remind him. I know that it was a bit early to be bringing up such things, but I was curious. My family had noticed how angered I was the night of the letter. At the time, I had thought that I had the right to. I still, in the back of my mind somewhere, believed that.

“You’re in an athletic high school, correct?”

“Pardon?” I ask, completely startled by the question itself. He repeats himself, a small smirk on his lips. I slowly realize how much of a melting pot that smile can be.

“Yeah,” I respond, my eyes wide with curiosity. He digs his hands into his jean pockets and smiles.

“Are you a fast runner, then?” Insu asks, brushing his short, black hair from his piercing eyes. I nod. He smiles to himself, like he’s thinking of a joke between him and someone else, and I watch as he takes a step towards me. He pokes my sides, his girly fingers digging into my sides, before running away as fast as he can.

“Yah!” I scream, pumping my fists as fast as I possibly can, trying my best to catch him. He ends up tripping up in the road, and I grab onto his arm, flipping him around to catch a wide smile on his face. He pulls me into a hug, and I accept willingly, the aftershocks leaving my body through my fingertips. We’re laughing until the curfew bell rings and we’re forced to walk back home.

“I hope that my father isn’t that bad,” I mumble, heading up the porch steps, “I hope you don’t feel like leaving or whatever because of his domineering presence.”

Insu shrugs, “I’ve dealt with worse, I can promise you that.” I don’t ask him about the full truth on that statement.

I grab onto the doorknob, ready to walk through the door, when Insu grabs my wrist and pulls me around again.

“Where’s my goodnight kiss?” he asks, and before I can reply, he presses his lips against mine.

They’re so soft.

**

The second day he’s here, I bring him to the only big green space in town, the middle of our little brook where families like to sit a chat, or kids like to run around and dare to scoop pennies and dimes out from the fountains that decorate the gray and white pathways. It’s peaceful, very peaceful, with the sounds of nature, from the grass crackling underneath footsteps to the soft trickling of water.

“Why did you bring me here?” Insu asks. His pale skin shines in the summer’s light, his dark hair shining underneath the sun that leaks between the trees. He looks uncomfortable, out in the open like this, covered only by the trees, his eyes darting around to see if anyone is watching. I wish to reach out to him, to grab his hand and promise that everything will be alright; but it isn’t nighttime and people can see.

I shrug, the corners of my lips turning up a little. “I just thought that you would prefer it here than stuffed up with my father. You’re leaving tomorrow, right? I wanted to show you as much of our town as possible before you had to leave… I’m sorry, we can go back if you really want to…”

I start to turn back around when he grabs onto my wrist and flips me back around, a bright smile on his lips. I hadn’t noticed how pretty his teeth were until this moment, when I see the bright contrast, and I wonder, yet again, if there is anything at all that makes him imperfect. From what I have seen, it doesn’t seem to be like it.

“No, Yujin-ah, I really like it here,” he says, sliding his fingers down from my wrist to my hand, and we hold them together, my lips pulling into a wider smile. I feel foolish suddenly and keep my head down, my cheeks turning a tint of red. “Yujin-ah?” he asks.

I don’t look up, but soon, I feel the softness of his fingers brushing against my chin, and he pulls my head up. The memory of last night’s kiss runs past my eyes like a movie; it was spectacular, that was the truth. Insu leans in, so close that I’m sure that our noses are brushing in, and turns his head just a little bit, so that our lips can mesh beautifully. My free hand rises up and goes to his neck, my fingernails barely scraping the skin, before I put my hand down flat onto his neck.

He pecks me on the cheek before we pull away, and I wish that he didn’t have to leave for tomorrow. He swings back on his heels, his hands finding home in his pockets. Insu raises his eyebrow and cocks his head to the side, and we continue our walk through the park. Sometimes, when we’re walking, my hand brushes his arms, and I blush. I know he’s noticing because each time this happens, a small chuckle leaves his lips.

**

The next morning I stand on the platform with my father and Insu, waiting for the train to come and whisk him away, back to the sixth province. We all look a bit stupid, but at least I am not wearing something skimpy—the clothing is appropriate and I’m thankful for the second day of sunshine that has been brought upon us. He still wears a coat, though, ready for the harsh winter that will meet him when he steps out of the train, back home.

I stand way too close to him, and my father keeps his distance, thank god. I smile awkwardly, leaning back and forth on my toes. My curiosity has never been one of my pros, and I think of this fact now. This whole weekend, I had been wondering, waiting for when Insu would eventually tell me what it was exactly that he was so desperate to tell me at first, and then so casual to talk about, now. There were many occasions that I had almost shaken it out of him, before remembering normal interactions between matches. Matches didn’t fight.

“So,” I say, pulling the word apart and letting it roll of my tongue. His smile appears again, and I seriously wish that I could wipe that grin off of his face—but I love it way too much to really hit him that hard for it. He cocks his head to the side and I roll my eyes, pushing his shoulder just a little bit, to prove some sort of point (that point, I’m still not that sure about, of course). “Come on, just tell me!” I pout, and that seems to work.

He looks up, to see that the train has appeared, fading into view from the distance. He grabs my wrist, kisses my cheek, and puts his lips right next to my ear. “I’m a girl. Son Ga-in.”

My eyes widen and my world breaks in two. Before I can do anything, that smirk has mounted the train and is about to disappear to better places. And unfortunately, I don’t have a ticket.

**

My match was a girl. I had a trouble believing that that was the truth, to be honest. The Capitale made sure that everyone was paired up accordingly, and that nature supported it. Why did they pair me up with a girl, then? Insu. Ga-in. Boy. Girl. There was such a big difference, but why was I the only one that really knew the difference between Son Insu and Son Ga-in, now. Ga-in made a pretty believable boy. She looked, acted, and even felt like a boy. I didn’t get it.

Her hands.

Suddenly the fact jumped to my head. Her hands were far too small, far too feminine to ever belong to a man. That had jumped to my attention when we first held hands, and then every time afterwards. I had always, always, considered them as a red flag, but had quickly pushed it aside. This was the Capitale. The Capitale was supposed to be right—they were always right.

So what was wrong with this scene, then? Why did it end up being like this? Why was a matched up with a girl? This wasn’t natural. Sure, Ga-in could pass as a pretty good boy… Had the Capitale forced her to be a guy? So that she could be matched up with me, a girl, too? Was the scales tipped?

“The sixth province,” I breathed. Did it have something to do with the Winternorth people? Was something bad going on over there, something that I didn’t have the slightest clue about? Was Ga-in a Winternorth, smuggled into here by some spy or something, and forced with a male identity not to get caught?

I pressed my face down into the mattress, forcing myself to let go of all the questions that flocked around my head like birds. I just needed some rest, I told myself. When I woke up in the morning, I could easily send a letter to Insu before I went to school, just asking for some clarification. To be perfectly honest, it could have just been a little game, a joke that he was playing to make fun of me or something. I tried to laugh but nothing came out but the worry that was clogging up in my throat.

I just wanted to sleep, I told myself. I had spent all day worrying, and in the process worrying my family, who kept on giving me odd looks when I huffed all around the house, not sure how to spend the rest of my Sunday. They suggested going for a walk, or calling up with Jinah, all suggestions that I politely turned down.

I didn’t want to leave the house; I wanted to call Insu and get to the bottom of this. That, unfortunately, did not seem possible. He was probably on the train, minding his own business, maybe reading a book or listening to some music, squished between others on the train. Calls weren’t possible on trains, they moved that fast.

I finally went downstairs on the training machine and started running until I felt like my lungs would explode. I closed my eyes and pretended that I was running towards the truth—but every time that I had thought that I had reached the end, there was just another corner, and I would be running for another few minutes. The machine eventually stopped and told me to go to bed.

I tried to drift off to sleep, my eyes dreaming of Insu’s (or Ga-in’s) dazzling face and features. What would it be like between us now? Would it really be the same? Would it be ok? I had a trouble believing it; even that Insu was a girl. But his hands, I told myself.

I fell asleep smiling.

**

“So, how was your first encounter with the third kind?” Cheolyong asks me when we’re spending our free time next Saturday playing games, mainly card games that don’t require that much attention or skill. We’ve both decided that we don’t’ feel like thinking tonight; our minds fogged with afternoons spent with our other-halves.

I had tried working over the course of the week, to keep my school marks up, but I had been unable to concentrate because of Ga-in/Insu, and so, spent most of my time wishing that Jinah was in my class, and not in who-knows-where, now. And Cheolyong had gone off to the outlands of the province to meet Jiyeon, his match, and had been approved a week to spend with her. That meant that I was left without my two best friends for the course of the week.

I laugh, “He was fine, thank you very much. It wasn’t like he was some type of mutant or anything.” He rolls his eyes, that same look I remember seeing on his face when we were younger pasted onto his lips. “I got airmail from him recently, actually. Two weeks from now, and I will be going to the sixth province, to meet him.” I wink, throwing some of my brown hair over my shoulder. Cheolyong laughs. “How was yours?”

Cheolyong sighs. “She’s fine, very fine. But she’s very self-conscious. She kept on making sure that she looked ok. I doubt I’ll ever be as comfortable with her as I am with you, Yujin.” I look down at my hand, placing a card down above the pile—beating his next card. He sets another down, as do I, before I finally speak up.

“But you’re a very comforting person, Cheolyong, I’m sure that’s why you were matched with her. I’m sure that you’ll eventually make her turn over and show her more confident side. I promise. Opposites attract, right?” I smile to try to comfort him, and he smiles back.

We finish the game, grab our coats, and walk home together.

“We are pretty comfortable together, aren’t we?” I ask, a small smirk placed upon my lips, my hands in my pockets and my eyes watching the sky above us.

“It’s to be expected from a group of kids that have been together since they were very young,” Cheolyong answers, his steps in tune with mine, and I know that he is watching the sky with me. Silence falls like the sun and we’re comforted only by each other’s footsteps.

“Jiyeon is coming next week. I would love it if you met up with her,” Cheolyong says, and I look up from the heavens to turn him and I smile whole-heartedly. I had only heard little things about Jiyeon, and had seen her face on the screen during the Matching ceremony, but she was very pretty, and everything that I had heard about her from Cheolyong, which, unfortunately, wasn’t that much, seemed to be positive.

I nodded. “Of course, I would love to meet her, too!” I draped my arm around his shoulders and punched his ribcage. “I need to know who’s stealing my Cheolyong away from me.” We laugh.

“You sound so much like your father right now, Yujin,” he points out, and I hit his side once more, until he pretends to double over in pain, and I pretend to be calling for help, until Cheolyong shushes me with his hand and we run out of the streetlights until the only sounds are our footsteps and the curfew bell.

**

She is beautiful. Jiyeon is so beautiful that it’s almost annoying.

Cheolyong looks like he loves her when he looks into her eyes, and I instantly feel jealous. Jinah has been sending me messages in hope to brighten up my mood, but nothing that she could ever send would make me feel happy about myself at that moment—the moment where Cheolyong and Jiyeon walked in, hand in hand, flustered face turned to flustered face, smile to gorgeous smile.

The whole dinner is awkward, but I see the insecurities that Cheolyong spoke about. She turns around often in her seat, checks her makeup bag and her mirror, and keeps her eyes on her plate unless she’s brought into the conversation. I’m the third wheel—I shouldn’t talk that much. The conversation is therefore awkward, filled with small jokes about the people around us, and our matches. If Insu is ever brought up, Jiyeon seems to be much more interested.

I feel defensive when talking about Insu, so I try to answer the vaguest of answers as possible with the shortest answers. I’m not trying to be rude, I scream at Cheolyong with my eyes when Cheolyong glares at me during the yes-and-no questionnaire, but seeing as Insu had only airmailed me twice since our last meeting, I was still very on the fence about everything. And with no one to talk to it about, I felt like any moment we talked about it, I would eventually spill the truth: that Insu may be a girl.

I had wanted to tell either Jinah or Cheolyong about this for so long, but had never been able to find time to really come clean. Of course I wanted to say the truth! If I could, I would have earlier, but I couldn’t. And somewhere in the back of my mind, I knew that Insu wouldn’t want me blabbing my mouth about something that was obviously so private that it had taken so long for him to admit it to me.

Great job back there, reads the text that Cheolyong sends a few minutes after, when I’m on my way home from the restaurant. I bite down in my tongue and stuff my phone into my pocket, keeping up my pace to make sure that I don’t text something bad or call him up and start screaming at him. I pump my fists, walking as fast as I possibly can until I’m running, sprinting down to my house.

I sprint up the stairs and hide in my room. I pull out my phone, hide my head in my knees, and dial up Insu’s number before I realize what I’m doing. It’s probably five-thirty o’clock over there, I calculate in my head. I count the number of rings before I finally hear his voice.

“Yujin-ah?” Insu answers.

I sob, as much as I possibly can, until I’m positive that my eyes will never return to their natural colour. I just need to cry so much, I need to talk as honestly as possible.

“My best friend, h-he brought… he b-brought his match and asked me to eat with them tonight! S-She’s so be…beautiful and I feel so u-ugly whenever I’m around her. It’s those types of girls that I really hate. And she’s so compatible with Cheolyong! It’s just the way that they look into each other’s eyes that make me feel so stupid…” I don’t notice how much I’m rambling until laughing cuts me off.

“Why do you care about your best friend’s match, Yujin-ah?” Insu asks, and my knees slide down, my calves hitting the wooden floor. “You’re not matched with him, so why should it matter, who he’s paired up with? You know what, Yujin-ah? This match may be pretty, but she isn’t as pretty as you are. Yujin, I love you.”

“But you’re a girl,” I mumble, “But matches are supposed to be with a boy and a girl…”

Insu laughs, “The Capitale obviously wanted us to be matched. Think of it like that.”

“But Insu-”

“My name is Son Ga-in. Please call me that instead,” Ga-in corrects and I nod, like a scolded child. She sighs when I don’t reply. “Yujin-ah, if it really annoys you so much, I can pass as a boy, for the rest of eternity, and be Son Insu for you. But I had thought that you were different, especially when we went to the park together that one day, together. I hadn’t thought I was going to ever tell you; state myself as sterile. But I trusted you, and I still trust you. I’m sorry if I perceived it wrong.”

I shake my head. “N-no! Please, I would never want you to not trust me.” I can see the smile on her face through the receiver, the way that her lips would turn, the way she would look at me. I feel suddenly relieved by that.

“You’re still coming over in a week, yes?” She asks, and I hum yes. She laughs. “That’s great. I apologize, but I have to go.”

“Bye, Ga-in,” I mumble, and there’s a pause.

“Bye, Yujin-ah. I love you.”

**

Sunday is work, and I am slowly starting to despise work. Nothing keeps me entertained, working my fingers through the keyboard, through the mouse clicks, but I try my best to stay concentrated, to get better marks. The day my job will be elected is dawning on my quickly, and I bite my tongue and shake my head each time my employer or Jooyeon reminds me of it. It feels awkward, knowing that soon, you’ll be moving up.

“You’d be a great matcher,” my employer tells me, “Do you want me to put in a good word for you?”

I shake my head, smiling. “That isn’t necessary,” I reply as politely as I possibly can. He shakes his head and walks off.

Ga-in and I were a mistake. I would hate to be the one making the mistake.

**

It’s more than ten degrees colder from my home to Ga-in, and I sit, shivering in my seat. The Officials had had to send me with some warmer clothing when they had learned that I would be spending the week in the sixth province with Insu, to get closer to each other. It was one of the last few weeks of school, so if I studied for test week when I was with Insu every night, I would be fine, they advised.

I tucked away my mathematics text book, tucking into my hand bag. My suitcases sat above me in a cubby, locked up safely by a password that I played over and over in my head. When I had reached my stop, which just happened to be the last stop, all I had to do was punch in the numbers and then slide out my articles, and step off of the train.

It was very quiet, with barely any people left. When I had first walked onto the train, the whole carriage was filled with people, and so finding a spot was difficult. But slowly, people started getting off, walking off at certain provinces, and I had now passes the third, second and seventh, headed straight for the sixth province. And with me sat only a handful. Maybe the sixth province wasn’t that popular.

A shiver ran up my spine as I peered outside, watching the trees, evergreens reaching up and touching the gray sky. Ga-in had told me on the phone last night that there was still a lot of rain, which was normal in the late spring and early summer in the sixth province, because the winter had a very long death compared to the early spring and hot, humid summer I was used to back home.

Thankfully, it seemed like no rain would be falling down today, and I was grateful. I was now wearing something appropriate, though, a large parka that I thought was a bit of an over exaggeration for forty-six degrees, but I had stepped onto the train at sixty-nine, and by the way that the trees seemed to rustle outside, it looked rather windy. I had forgotten to pull my gloves out of my suitcase, and I fretted, hoping that I wouldn’t catch hypothermia or something similar because of the lack of them.

I smiled. I was probably just over exaggerating, I told myself, it couldn’t be that cold. If I really had that much trouble with the cold, I could just ask Ga-in for some gloves or something. She probably had an extra pair, just in case.

The train slowly rolled into the station, and the signal for all passengers to get off, as this was the final stop, went out. I unlocked the lock for my valuables, lifted my bag out of the compartment, and after waiting for everyone else to go past me in the aisles, walked off of the train.

As my feet the concrete near the tracks, I was hit by the fresh air. It smelled like pine. It was easy to see why—trees surrounded the train station, and I knew suddenly why the sixth province was praised for their forest industry. The sixth province were known for having a belt of rocks that meant minerals and a small amount of diamonds, but when the west had hit a block with their forestry production, they called upon the rest of the provinces to help them out, they had been able to grow more and more trees to support the need for paper production.

“What’s up?” I turn around to see Ga-in, smiling at me. I notice that she’s shorter than me, and that she’s wearing girl clothes, and I’m hit with shock, almost falling over my stuff. Ga-in laughs, grabbing onto my luggage and wheeling it behind her.

“You’ve changed,” I whisper into her ear, looking around at everyone on the train platform. Ga-in turns and plays with my hair, ruffling the edges. She seems pleased, and so, I’m pleased, but I hadn’t seen her like this before, only like Insu… Only ever Insu.

The hair was the same, the same black, short hair style. But a purple hairclip stood out and kept some of her bangs from getting into her eyes. She wore black eyeliner that made her brown eyes stand out, and when I looked down at her hands, she seemed to be wearing pink nail polish. Someone that I had thought previously was as flat as board now showed off just a bit of cleavage underneath her jacket. In other words, she had changed dramatically since I had first seen her.

“And you look cold. Where are you gloves?” Ga-in asks, reaching out to touch my hands. I shy away instinctively, rubbing my hands together in a vain attempt to warm them up. Ga-in laughs, reaching into one of her pockets and retrieving a pair of gloves, in which she hands them to me. “Hadn’t you known you were going to the province with nine months of winter?”

I look up, bewildered. “Really? Nine months? I hadn’t thought that we were so close to the borders…If I had, I would have packed better…” I’m stopped again by Ga-in laughter, which echoes throughout the trees.

“It’s a joke, Yujin-ah. Back when the country was fifty states, they called most of the sixth province the state with nine months of winter. I’ve only seen maybe six, tops. And you won’t be seeing that much snow, anyways; right now it’s our summer.” I blush, stuffing my hands into the gloves and sighing at the sudden relief that the heat brings me.

“Do you know anything more about that?” I ask sheepishly, kicking a pebble and watching it fly down a flight of stairs and almost hit a pole. We jog down the stairs, heading our way towards a bus stop, where Ga-in hands me a bus pass, one that she must have purchased for me when she had heard of my arrival.

Ga-in sits down on a bench and I follow suite. “I learnt that this used to be called ‘Michigan’, one of the few states that bordered a country called ‘Canada’, which is now Winternorth. There were roughly fifty-one or fifty-two states in total, all belonging to this wonderful country that used to be called the USOA or something similar. But roughly around 2100, the leaders were unable to govern their country, and that is when the Capitale came in and fixed everything up. Not only that, but they took down Canada, too, and cut off every single tie we had with them.

“Then the fifty-two states were divided into eleven provinces. The first was on the east coast, which was called ‘New England’, and this was supposed to be part of the province, but instead, it was grouped as the sixth province. The second province included Ohio, Indiana, West Virginia and Virginia, and Kentucky. The third is your province, yes? North Carolina, where you were in South Carolina, and Tennessee. The fourth province was the biggest—containing Florida, Mississippi, Georgia, Alabama, Louisiana, and Texas. The fifth is right underneath us, with Illinois, Iowa and Missouri. Then it’s Michigan and Wisconsin for the sixth province. The others I never learned, unfortunately, but supposedly the eleventh province had Alaska and Hawaii or something like that.”

“You’re so smart,” I whisper before I realize what has left my mouth and Ga-in smiles whole-heartedly. I look down at my shoes. “Just when you were saying all that, you looked so proud. You must really like history, don’t you?”

Ga-in nodded. “But historians aren’t as needed when you have the Capitale, right? They keep track of everything for you, don’t they? But when I was young, my dream of joining the Capitale and working on the log books like I still dream of doing was hit down. And so I gave up on it, just like a bunch of people do in the sixth province. You see, the only exciting thing here anymore is the matching ceremony, because people pray that they’ll be able to leave.”

The bus arrived, and our conversation suddenly fell silent. As we filed up to get onto the bus, Ga-in whispered into my ear, “I’ll tell you more when we get home.”

**

Her house was surrounded by forest, and the walkway was covered in dirt, and I suddenly wished for my lovely driveway back home instead of the slush that now accumulated around my feet. I smiled when Ga-in turned around, just to make sure I was still ok, and we had to hold hands the rest of the way. I didn’t mind.

“Why do you dress like a boy?” I ask, my feet warming up in front of the fireplace, a hot cup of tea in my hands, and Ga-in sitting beside me. The screen can easily be turned on, but I doubt there’s anything good on at one o’clock in the afternoon, and there are still a thousand questions that circle my head. I don’t want to watch some lifeless television; I want to know more about my match.

Ga-in sighs, setting down her tea on the coffee table in front of us. “I don’t really know what it is like in the third province, but here, it is hard. And unfortunately, even if our ancestors worked so hard to create equality, the sixth province was so backwards. The Winternorth people threaten to come into our houses every night and kids are taken from their families, and everyone just prays to disappear, because disappearing will be much better than the living hell their lives are right now.

“And for a woman, things were especially different. You see, my mother died when she was young, right after having me, actually. The match hadn’t worked as smoothly as the Capitale had thought it would and so she died, and I had barely any chance to really meet her. And so in that split moment, my father decided that I would be a man, instead of a woman. The doctor is a friend of my father’s, and so he made the documents read that I was a guy—that I was Son Insu. Because not that many officials stay in the sixth province, I was able to be a girl unless it was a special meeting, or a ceremony. Everyone here has really lost hope, and so no one cared about me pretending to be a boy. My father wanted me to have more opportunity than what I would get as a girl. And so, he made a decision that would help me in the long run.”

She sighed, tucking a loose strand behind her ear. I watched her profile, watching as she breathed through her nostrils, and out through her open mouth, and noticed that she had lip balm on. But her eyes, even if they did sparkle, were cold. Cold as the province she lived in.

“What are you going to do?” I asked, and she turned to me, confused.

“What?” she asked, puzzled, cocking her head to the side. This was the first time I had ever seen her look like this, and suddenly, a burst of confidence flowed throughout my veins. I swallowed.

“What are you going to do, Ga-in? You say that this province has no hope, that everyone here is a lost cause. You obviously don’t like it, so what are you going to do? How are you going to stop this from being such a hellhole? Ga-in, because you are pretending to be a man, you are a step up higher than everyone else. You’ve got the Capitale fooled—just look at your match. But it’s your match that is asking what are you going to do with this advantage? So answer me.”

Her gaze was stone cold, and I was breathing as hard as I could, wondering by what force was keeping our eyes locked so intensely.

“I’ll need someone to stay with me,” Ga-in says, and I smile brightly at the determination in her voice. Great! I set down my tea cup, so that the handle almost touches Ga-in’s, and twist myself on the sofa, my eyes stuck to her’s, watching as they morph as she thinks, the way her bottom lip pulls in between her lower and bottom lip.

“I’ll go with you,” I promise. I grab onto her hand but she pulls away, looking down at the tea cups, her face red from the heat that now circulates around.

“I don’t want you doing this simply because I want to. I may be your match, but you shouldn’t be forced into doing something as dangerous as this simply because you want me to do it. I don’t want you to get hurt,” Ga-in admits.

She doesn’t trust me. My mouth opens in shock and I watch as she starts getting up, getting ready to leave. “You should stay the week, anyways,” she advises, “Think of it as a vacation.” She is about to walk away when my hand grabs onto her wrist.

“I love you,” flies out of my lips. She looks down at me in shock, and her wide eyes make me cry, and soon I’m sobbing, sobbing so much more than I did back when I had seen Jiyeon for the first time, much more than I had when my grandfather had passed, so much more than anything else in my life.

She’s right beside me, patting my back and pushing my hair out of my face. I wipe my face with the back of my hand, chuckling to myself. “I’m sorry, I probably look really stupid.”

“You’re beautiful,” Ga-in admits, “You’re so damn beautiful.”

I gape, before chuckling again, tucking a strand behind my hair. “T-thanks.”

Ga-in smiles, “I want you to come with me, to fight with me. You’re strong.”

She cups my face and leans in, stealing a kiss from my lips. It’s different from the first time we kissed, I realize. This time it feels like a thousand things have been lifted off of my chest as I press myself closer and closer to Ga-in, in hopes to find out more about her. There are no secrets anymore. I feel happy. Safe.

“A week will be enough to plan things, yes?” I ask, and she nods.

“I reckon it will be,” she replies, kissing me on the nose and pulling me up from near the fireplace to start working. I smile to myself.

This might work.

**

“They’ll never listen.”

“Of course they will.”

“What if this leads to a rebellion of some sort? What if the Capitale goes against me?”

I sigh, patting Ga-in’s shoulder and kissing her cheek. She’s dressed up as Insu today, with a suit and a tie and she looks completely masculine. I wear her purple hairclip in my hair. Insu turns to me, kisses me chastely on the lips, and smiles, walking up the steps to the Capitale.

I don’t wait; I walk home. In the sixth province. Where Ga-in will come home.

--
end.
a/n: thank you everyone (tyler, especially, if he's reading this) that was patient with me with this fic and told me to finish it, goddammit, or they'd kill me! fic ended up being 12.6k in the end, which is the longest, and they'll just keep on getting bigger!
a/n1: this pairing is real, guys. look it up.
a/n2: hope you enjoyed and it made sense? yeah

nine months 1/2 {ga-in/uee}

mywookness — Thu, 01 Nov 2012 02:54:10 GMT

nine months (that i have waited for you in the snow
ga-in/uee
future!au ; r
based on the book matched and the book the giver mixed into one fic ; written for the femmebigbang

“You’re almost seventeen, right?” Jinah asks, fingers drumming my thigh as we head to school. I nod, looking out into the spring air. April had just begun, and soon, I would be crowned a seventeen-year-old, which, to some, was the most important time of anyone’s life.

I smile, biting down on her lip, sucking the very life out of it, as I try to keep my vision ahead. Jinah was already seventeen, the ring on her finger was enough—she was already married to a nice guy named Seungho, and they seemed to be enjoying their lives together. She would be finishing school in June, and then they’d be off to the ‘selection ceremony’, which chose your job for you.

We lived a life without choice. Everything these days was about procreation and population. Pairs were paired up to make sure that their children would grow up to be strong and healthy, regardless of whether or not the two people knew each other in real life—or if they liked each other. You could choose to be alone, of course, or they would force you to be alone in some cases, but no one wanted to be alone.

Not in the world where the most important days of your life was on your seventeenth year, when the couples were chosen, and the eighteenth year, when you job was chosen. And everything flowed like that until you were eighty years old, where you were killed silently around your family.

I looked out the window of the bus we rode on each day, trying to keep my attention from the meddlesome thoughts that rose and fell in my head like crashing waves. I was excited to find out who was her future lover, of course—but at the same time, I half-wished that I could have been chosen to be single. But I was strong, like my parents, and I would be having pretty and healthy children.

“He’ll be so handsome,” Jinah comments, taking my hand into her own, “Each year; the boys seem to become more handsome than the last. And for someone as beautiful as you, they need to choose someone hot.” I break out in a smile, and the almost-silent bus erupts in our laughter.

Jinah and I have lived on the same street for our whole lives, and maybe that’s the reason why we are so close. She lived across the street, and when my family were moved here, she was the first person to really introduce me to everything and help me settle in and find a good group of friends. Since we’ve taken the same bus to school for at least seven years of their lives, we have grown very close. I find it a relief, because Jinah has already experienced all the things I have to go through.

“Unnie,” I say, dragging out the syllable, “What if my husband is really ugly?” Of course, that isn’t the main point of it—I have learned from the stories of the Old Society that looks are nothing, and beauty and looks can result to obsessions, murder, and people actually following their idols.

Jinah shrugs, pressing the button that signals the bus driver to stop at the next stop. The bus lurches to a stop, and we get off the bus. She turns around, blond hair flying as she does so, and smiles, signaling for me to come quickly. I do, and smile as Jinah drapes an arm over my shoulder.

“You’ll do fine, Yujin-ah,” Jinah says, looking up at the sky and admiring its cloudless face. “There has always been luck on your side, fair one.” I cringe at the word ‘luck’—it’s the word of the foolish, a word that was only really used in the Old Society times, where people actually believed more in feelings in their intestines than statistics and logic, which in the end, might have resulted in their emotion-driven attitudes at life.

“You speak too quickly, Jinah-unnie,” I advise as we walk up the steps to our school, and Jinah shrugs, parting and heading for the fourth year classrooms whilst I take slow steps to my own class.

**

“You’re beautiful,” Cheolyong admits, looking over me, with my purple dress. We have been next-door neighbours since forever, and our parents have been friends since the beginning, so even if I hate it sometimes, I have seen him a lot more often than I would have maybe liked. We sit awkwardly on the plastic chairs of the train, as it brings us closer and closer to City Hall, where we will enjoy the Match banquet, and the end, find out who we will end up being with for the rest of their lives.

I shiver as the air conditioning is bumped up even more, and I rub my sleeveless arms. All the dresses didn’t come with shawls or sleeves and I want to ask who designed them like this, especially in June, when everyone would be using the air conditioning to the maximum. The warming of the Old Society had dropped down significantly since the new rule, but still, it was still way too hot for many people without some kind of fan.

“And you’re very handsome.” It’s Cheolyong’s time to roll his eyes as he lays back into the chair, playing with the cuffs on his suit. Unlike the girls, who got to pick out the colour that they would wear for the night, he wears plain black and white, and I’m reminded of those old-fashion films that I had seen back with my grandmother.

“I wasn’t kidding, though,” he admits, reaching out and touching the soft silk of my dress, “You really do look beautiful. I’m envious for the man that shows up on your screen tonight.” I roll my eyes and return to looking out the window. I hear Cheolyong sigh, and without looking, I reach down and link our fingers together.

Just like I had done when we were younger, and he had been afraid of going into the pool. He kept on jumping from foot to foot, looking at the chlorine blue water and biting down on his lip. “Come on, it will be fun!” Cheolyong shook his head back and forth.

“How can something like that be fun?” I had rolled my eyes, crossing my arms sternly against my chest.

“It’s nice and cool in the water, not hot like it is out here,” I explain, “And you feel like you’re flying once you go underwater!” Cheolyong took a step back, and I brushed some hair from my eyes, grabbing his hand and pulling him closer. “If you go in, I’ll give you a kiss.”

Cheolyong’s eyes light up with unanswered questions, and without any more questioning, he jumps in with me. I had hated kissing him, but it was a small peck, right before Cheolyong’s parents came out from my house and told him that it was time for him to go home, but he would be back the next day.

Cheolyong seems to remember this memory, too, because his eyes soften. Like when I had coaxed him and made him feel at ease when they were younger, he does the same now, relieving any of the stress and nervousness that comes out that night, as they ride closer and closer to their fates.

**

Cheolyong held my hand tight as we walked up the marble steps to the City Hall. It was a flurry of blacks, whites, purples, pinks, yellows, blues and greens as the teenagers of our city rushed up, eager to find out who would be their Match. It wasn’t much; they only got a silver box that told them their personal information and a picture, but it was still enough to have so many hearts fluttering. The group divided at the fork in the road—the boys going one way, and the girls went one way, and we stood their awkwardly.

“I’ll see you on the other side,” he promised, “And then we have to squeal about our matches on our way home.” He winks, like that’s supposed to help me, and joins the crowd of black and white tuxedos and suits, and in time, I join my line too.

I sit down in a table with a few girls with my same last name. In this city, there are only a few last names. We don’t all come from the same families, of course, but according to the studies by the Capitale, if people have the same last name, they are able to connect easier. There are about four Kim tables filled with girls and their families, and I sit down beside my mother and another girl. My mother’s hand feels nice and warm and clutch to it as much as I can.

“Welcome, everyone, to the 76th official Matching Ceremony! This year, we hope only the best for everyone, and that everyone is happy. Strong, long and lasting lives for all!” The emcee says, and everyone repeats the last line. It was issued by the Capitale years ago, and it has just stuck. That is what the Capitale does for us. They give us strong and long lasting lives in exchange for silence and loyalty.

She smiles down at us, her pink lip gloss shining underneath the lights. She must be someone from the Capitale, I think—no one in our city is that glamorous. She wears a coat that looks like ice or maybe diamonds and I spend minutes just looking at it instead of listening to the rules and regulations. It doesn’t matter—I read over them before I left.

The names get read off, and someone appears on the screen. There is cheering and a man in black walks over to one of the guys that stands up in the room and hands him his box, containing all he will ever need to know about his match. He smiles, there is another round of applause, before another name is read off, and the matching continues.

“Kim Yujin,” she calls, and I stand up. I look at the screen bravely. I don’t know who will appear on the screen, they may be from someplace completely different to where I am standing right now, but my complete body is shivering. I’m dying to know who I will be spending the rest of my life with. I’m tempted to bite my nails, but my mother is standing right behind me, and I need to be ladylike to impress the man that will appear on my screen.

“Son Insu from the sixth province,” she says, and his face flies up onto the screen.

I have never seen a man more beautiful than the one that stood before me. He had short, uneven black hair, small eyes, and a small frame. He looked a little short but maybe I was just really tall. His tuxedo showed off his strong, reliable muscles and I wished that I could see the ripple in his arms.

We stared at each other for a while, before Insu smiled, cocking his head to the side and waving. “Hello, Yujin-ah~” he chirped. The crowd erupted in gasps—no matches really talked to each other—but I somehow ended up waving back to him. He seemed to smile even more, before the screen faded to black, and I was forced to sit back down.

I hold the silver box in my hands, itching to open it. My mom smiles, touching my forearm, and I smile back.

“Good job, honey,” she says, and I smile.

I can’t wait to see Insu.

**

Saturday rolls in and I spend my free time with my friends at the games room. Anyone and everyone is chattering about their matches, squealing about how perfect they are or their hobbies, or anything else they have found that makes them a match made in heaven.

Cheolyong’s partner, a girl named Jiyeon from the faming outlands of the province, wasn’t on his lips, though. He listened as everyone talked about their couples with a small smile on his face. When I had seen him stand up last night, his face was filled with something that I had never seen before. He still had that look on his face, still, after a full night. Was he truly in love with her already?

I just could only hope the best for both of them.

“What is your partner like, Cheolyong-ah?” Jinah asked. Even if she had been working all day, in and out and in and out as a nurse for the main hospital downtown, she seemed as bright as ever. She had received the work position a few days ago, and soon, she would be stopping school. It was almost depressing; I wanted her to stay just a little bit longer.

“She’s perfect,” Cheolyong replies, setting his chin on his hand, “Jiyeon is just the life that I have been looking for. It’s nice to see someone that is so close to me. When I saw her on the screen, I knew that the Matching Committee had done well. They knew me well enough to pair me up with someone as gorgeous as her.”

The rest of the group giggles, and I smile, grabbing onto his hand. “How about we play a game, together? Strategy, perhaps?” Cheolyong laughs—both he and I know that he sucks at these kinds of games but he will always humor me—and tightens the grip in my hand, pulling me towards the tables and sitting me down at the table.

I look at the pieces on the board and smirk. Long ago, with the Old People, they used to play a game called ‘chess’, in which the players tried to overtake and conquer someone else’s side of the board and eventually kill their king. The Capitale had decided that this game was too violent for us to play, but they agreed that the strategic plays in the game would help in choosing our careers. It was a softened version of chess, but still difficult to a new player.

I move my first piece. This one is worth less and so therefore, I am fine with him killing it off with his piece that is worth the same value. I don’t enjoy killing off my pieces, but my Grandmother, when she taught this game to me when I was younger, told me that if you go through just a little bit of sacrifice, you can get what you really want in the end.

Cheolyong looked up as I had lost my player of five points. It was a strategic move, though, but he is way too flabbergasted by my loss to even look down on the board and realize how powerful I am now, even if I had just lost a player of importance. With a matching smirk, I lift my most powerful player, who the Old People called the queen, and moves her right in front of the ‘king’, knocking him down.

“Wha-” Cheolyong mumbles, looking up to watch me. His expression is adorable, so I hit his cheek and smile just a little, standing up from the table and extending my hand. He pouts, just a little, and I wish that I could just wipe that little pout from his lips.

“Yujin,” Cheolyong says as we walk home from the games room, his hands in his work clothes, watching the sky. Before, according to my Grandmother, there was so much artificial light that people couldn’t even see the stars at night because of how they overpowered the beautiful stars. I always thought that that was stupid—the stars were bright and majestic, compared to the blindness of light bulbs.

“Yeah?” I reply. The informal language is not supported by the Capitale, but we are so close these days that it feels wrong to use it when we’re alone, together like this. Plus, he had a nasty habit of squeaking his voice when he says miss, so I have eventually gotten past the informal speech just so that I won’t have to deal with his squeaky voice.

I turn to him. His eyes twinkle like the stars, and I realize that this was the thing I loved the most about him. You could figure out his whole life story just by looking into his eyes. He showed everything he felt in them, and that was surprisingly appreciated. Everyone, like the Officials that marched through the town with their guns and sticks, demanding personal information and complete loyalty, were serious and iron cold. Cheolyong was open and free.

“What would it have been like, if, you know, we weren’t matched up? Do you think, that you and I, could have been together or something?” His words are slow, as if he is trying to make sure that the words are perfect. I laugh at his awkwardness, and how he holds his hands, like when he was doing oral presentations in front of the class back when we were younger.

I stop in my tracks and watch him. He is handsome. I had always thought that he would become a handsome man when he got older, but his boyish charm still exists in his protective gaze. Even if I like to think that I was protecting him, that I was the stronger one, the way that he looks at me now makes me doubt my earlier thoughts.

“Like, if we could have dated? Married?” I ask.

Everyone was allowed to have crushes and admirations. Kids were allowed to give innocent kisses like it wasn’t important, because eventually, we would be paired up with someone. We would be given someone that, according to your statistics, was perfect for you. You could play around, sure, but any crushes or foolish dreams should be swept away immediately, because they could just lead to heartbreak or disappointment.

Cheolyong nods and I watch as he bites down on his lip. “I’ve liked you for a very long time, Yujin. I didn’t want to really say anything because I knew that it was impossible. But when I was matched with Jiyeon, I realized why I liked her so much. She’s just like you, just a little bit more outspoken. They matched me up with someone like you because they knew that we would have been perfect for each other personality wise.”

But Insu isn’t like Cheolyong at all. I want to say this. But I keep my mouth shut because I know that Cheolyong is going through a lot at this moment. I scan my eyes across his body. If we hadn’t been matched, could we have been a couple? I could see the unfairness in his eyes as he looked at me, before he broke out into a smile.

“Could you, perhaps, humour me by giving me just a short kiss?” He’s twisting the bottom of his shirt now, like a little child, and I’m tempted to slap his hands away, because the action is slowly driving me insane.

“Fine.”

I lean in and give him a small peck on his lips. He wants to do more, I can feel it in the eagerness of his hands, but the siren sounds, signalling for us to get home. His eyes are wide with want but all I can do is mouth a sorry and run back home, my lips burning with intensity.

**

Work is work.

Sunday is spent on working, so I make sure that I take the earliest train to get there on time. I’m usually not late, but there is always something that might happen—there is always room for error. I sit down on my chair beside thousands of other people, absent-mindedly watching everything that happens around me whilst my computer starts up here.

To some, we are called the back-up. Because that is our job, to make sure that everything is working extremely well. If the computers shut down, we are still working, making sure that everything is working. We are still here. And that is why we are so important. We sort codes and find patterns, and keep the patterns that are important.

I sign into the computer and smile when they greet me, welcoming me back to work. The only sounds are the clicks of mice and the tapping on the keyboard. Everyone is caring about what they are doing, and not what is around them. I like this feeling. You could maybe run down the hallways, but no one would notice you, because they are working hard. This is a nice environment, compared to the living hell that Jinah must go through.

I breathe out a sigh and start the sorting program. I must start finding the patterns and the signs early, or all will fall apart. I push everything from my mind and start sorting, weaving my way through the codes and picking out the bad ones. I wipe everything my mind and just work.

“I’m sure that you’re going to be in some sort of matching when you get picked,” a girl from work, Jooyeon, comments. I give her a small smile and she nods, heading off to a different train stop. I wait patiently for mine to arrive. The sun is setting behind me, and hopefully my food won’t arrive before I get home. I like my food hot and recently, it’s been the perfect temperature.

“Hey! Yujin-ah!” I turn around and find Jinah waving at me, rushing to the train stop. I grab her hand when she arrives. Her hands feel sickly and cold, so I hope that by holding them, I’m able to heat them up. She smiles, thanking me for heating them up, and we watch the sunset together as we wait.

“How was work today, miss?” I ask. Working at the hospital seems to tire her out pretty quickly, mainly because she’s at the bottom and she has to work a lot to get to the top. She has heard rumors that Seungho, her match, will be coming to work as an Official in the town, which is amazing for the both of them, which also adds to the stress.

“Tiresome, as usual. Doctor Cho keeps on pointing out my mistakes! If he wasn’t so hunky I would have punched his face by now,” Jinah replies, pouting adorably. I remember, back when she was at school, when she would unintentionally get many of the boys in her class and the younger classes to fall in love with her—even if she had always flirted with the seniors, and sometimes the teachers. She was an interesting girl, to say the least.

“Do you know when Seungho is coming?” I ask, trying my best to lighten the mood. When she had been matched up, she couldn’t stop talking about him. It made me ten times more excited to learn who would be my partner. And Insu had lived up to expectations. He was perfect.

“Yeah, on Tuesday. He sent me an airmail yesterday telling me everything about it. He’s been chosen as an Official, and we’ll be getting a house closer to the downtown, now, because of it. I don’t know when, but the Capitale has asked me to start packing just in case,” she answers, and I can hear the sadness in her voice.

“I don’t want you to leave, miss,” I say, “I don’t want you to move away… We have been together for so long already; I don’t want you to have to go someplace else simply because the Capitale thinks that it will be better for you. You’re still eighteen! Does this mean that you will be having kids soon or something?” My eyes swell up and I feel like crying, but Jinah pats my back, soothing me.

“That makes two of us.”

The train arrives.

**

School comes way too quickly and I wonder where my weekend went. The train feels empty without my riding buddy, so I sit beside a girl named Jiyoung, a senior who used to go to the same school as us, before getting picked as a helper at the music stage further downtown because of her passion for music. She’s beautiful, and her husband, Yoochun, is a perfect fit for her, it seems, the way they present themselves is very similar for the both of them.

I have to get off first because she’s headed further in, so I wave goodbye before stepping off the train stop. It’s a bit early to be going to class, some kids are still doing their recreation hours but mine were completed in the winter, so I’m lucky to have fewer things to do in the morning. My clock wakes me up at a certain time, just to make sure that I get to school at an appropriate time, but the things that I do between those hours are completely up to me.

I settle down in the cafeteria, which is empty around this time, and open up my scribe. There are assignments from the age of four to now—things that I have gotten good marks at, and things that I have needed to work on. I open up a new document and title it ‘private’, before starting to type up.

I write exactly what I know about Insu. I’m nervously excited for tonight, when he will send me airmail. And then, I, in turn, will reply to him with a great letter expressing my utter delight to be paired up, to be matched, with someone as talented as he is. At first, I wondered if they had such devices in the sixth province, but I reminded myself that the Capitale would do anything to keep a strong Match.

I know that he is from the sixth province. He has three best friends—all girls, weirdly enough—two named Hyojin and one named Mihye, and he has a rough life and has a dark personality. Insu hates swimming but loves sprinting and jumping. He takes risks. To anyone, this would sound like someone that comes from the sixth province, but to me, he is a completely different person, and he is completely different from everyone else. I smile, doodling him a little knowing that I can never do him justice.

I hope his eyes are pretty.

**

“Your airmail arrived today,” my mother says as I return from school. I smile proudly, thanking her and walking into the living room. I wish that I could close the door, so that I could have all my secrets here and I wouldn’t have the chance of my mother seeing it. Anyone seeing it. I knew that being selfish was the last thing anyone wanted me to do, but even the mentioning of Insu’s name made my heart flutter just a tad.

“Open,” I order. The letter opens and I read it quickly. It’s just a sentence, just a simple sentence, and I have to read it over again and again, making sure that there are no secret codes or anything. Where are the lovey-dovey words? Where are the comments that I am the only one for him, or that he’s super excited, as am I? I have nothing to reply back to this, except maybe ‘ok’, and I stare blankly at it for a second.

Was this just it?

We need to talk, it reads, and with every word, my heart breaks just a little. We need to talk, seriously? Why couldn’t we talk by airmail? It was safe—the Capitale made sure that it was safe and that there were no viruses or others reading it. Did he want to meet me face-to-face? Even if that made me a little excited, I wanted more of an explanation than just that.

I pull out a chair and start typing back. I don’t care if this was supposed to be secretive or whatever the hell he was trying to keep ‘a secret’, I’m angry. This is our first words together since the hellos, and I want to know more about him, by his own words, not just by the words that the Capitale gives me. He’s an interesting character, a puzzle, and we are supposed to fit together.

Dear Insu,

If you mean that we must talk face-to-face, I have no way to transport to the sixth province, therefore you must come here to meet me and have this chat. I’m sorry if this is an inconvenience for you, but I have things to do, I am a busy person, and I don’t have time for this secretive stuff that you are trying to pull off. I want to be your Match; we are Matched, so we should lose the secrets and the lies as soon as possible, which is understandable, yes?

- Yujin

I close the screen and lie back into my chair. Something that was supposed to be happy and heartfelt has now turned to acid. I pull myself up from my seat and walk into the kitchen, my head as low as my aspirations.

“You should go outside,” my mother suggests, “Or go find Jinah. Today is her last day, supposedly, in the borough.”

“I don’t want to,” I bite back, walking down the stairs into the basement. I find my exercise clothes, and find the treadmill, slipping on my running shoes and standing on the exercising machine, watching the dials. I attach the devices that track my heart rate and breathing rate, breathing in slowly and then back out, before starting the machine and starting to run my heart out.

Maybe that will make me forget my expectations, I think, as my feet hit the treadmill again and again, my arms swinging back and forth as I punch the air, wishing that it was that sentence. We need to talk.

**

I meet him eventually, and unfortunately, he’s exactly what I would have wanted in a man. His jet black hair shone underneath the lamp lights as he stepped off of the train and walked over to me, who hugging myself, having chosen a terrible choice of clothing just to create a good first impression. Dumbly, I had followed Jinah’s advice and had chosen something skimpy when the forecast had called for rain. I looked stupid under Insu’s eyes.

“You look beautiful,” he says, running his warm hands up my arms. His smile is warm and it feels good to be at the receiving end of it. It feels like some type of dream, him being right here, warming me up as I turn into some sort of mess in front of him. Insu looks ten times better than on a screen, flashing all his likes. I should know everything about him, just like he should know everything about me, but no words seem to come to my lips.

So all I do is giggle. “I’m not, I’m foolish. Can we try to get out of the rain as soon as possible?” I ask and Insu nods. He laces our fingers together and I shiver—his hands are small, feminine, and feel oddly fragile. My hands feel brutish compared to his, and I wish to draw back, but his fingernails seem to dig into the back of my hand. It doesn’t hurt, no, it feels oddly calming, but the sensation is new compared to the softness and kindness I had dealt with all through my life.

“How was your trip? It is a very long way from here. I bet you’re pretty tired,” I say to start up conversation. I’m usually not surrounded by people that don’t talk much—Cheolyong is chatty whenever we aren’t alone, and Jinah has a mouth for the both of us. It feels awkward. Sure, there is that wonderful, undeniable attraction that probably had us paired up in the first place. But what if we don’t actually ‘click’? What if we can’t talk for hours, like my parents can?

Insu shakes his head, “I’ve gone on longer trips. I slept most of the way, of course. There were a lot of officers here, though. They kept on looking at me. I presume you know about the people from my province.” I nod, gripping his hand tighter.

The sixth province is known for being brutish and filled with outlaws. Because they are closest to the border with the Winternorth countries, they are filled with illegal immigrants, just like the Summersouth countries of the south. Unfortunately, the Winternorth immigrants have a tendency to steal whatever they need from us, and then disappear back to their country. With all this theft, a lot of money is spent to try to create better division systems between the two countries, but it hasn’t worked out that well.

I look at Insu, cocking my head to the side. He does have that paled skin that I remember seeing in the textbooks, with pictures of tribal men wearing fur and the caption, ‘Winternorth men.’ That is realistically the only thing that defines a Winternorth’s outer appearance, because of the multiculturalism that used to thrive before the downfall of the structure. His eyes seem different, too, but they are certainly not the kind that I would see on a Winternorth.

I don’t ask because really, I don’t want to know.

“I doubt that they would care about someone native to the province, right? It’s only the thieves that they should be caring about. If you were on the Matching list, then you should be.” Insu smiles, moving his hand from my hands to my shoulder, bringing me into his chest.

“Exactly.”

I pat his arm that drapes over my arm. I know that one the code of conduct that public displays of affection are ok, just if they’re done in moderation, but the imprint he leaves is so foreign. Jinah’s arm is heavy and Cheolyong doesn’t like touching that much—Insu’s arm is light, like an angel’s wing. “I’m sorry that we have to take the bus home. My mother had wanted to pick us up, but she was very busy this afternoon.”

Insu smiles, “That’s totally fine. That means I’ll be close to you.” I blush by habit. The compliments seem to just run off his tongue, and I’m envious. I wish I could just say whatever came to mind—and there were a lot of things that came to mind—but I was afraid that it would just end up like a string of syllables that wouldn’t work well together.

“Things are so much better here,” Insu whispered, watching in awe as the buildings melted past us as we rode past on the crowded bus. Everyone could see that he wasn’t from around here; no one had really shown any interest in the flat geography of our little province. I touched his thigh, bringing him out of his daze, surprised by the firmness of the muscle. He had looked strong when my eyes had first laid eyes on him, and his bio had outlined all of the sports he had done when he was younger, but I couldn’t help but blush.

“I would like to go to your province one day, too,” I admit, wondering how the sixth province could be so much different from our own. I wanted to see snow, too, something that had been restricted from me seeing as I was on the coast, and I was further south. I stared in awe at movies that showed snow, wishing to cup it into my hands.

Insu smiles, patting my hand with his feminine ones, “Maybe you’ll come over to my place, next time.” I cannot deny the fact that that would please me very much.

“If your family is willing to accept me for a couple of days, of course,” I reply. Insu nods, turning back to the window.

I soon realize that his family is a very touchy subject indeed. For someone who could seem so warm, he turns cold when he sees my father. My father is a naturally tall and protective man, who has worked hard since the beginning to get to where he is now. Naturally, my mother is the same way, but my father’s prejudices have been burned into his head. He’s old, now, but was born just two years after the take-over, the change, the Capitale.

Supposedly, according to my history teacher, the people that were born around this era were naturally more prejudice, because the government had still not controlled the problem of the sixth province (and many people still believed that they hadn’t just yet), and called any people that had moved from the sixth province ‘vampires’, because of their characteristically paler skin.

I could see that same look in my father’s eyes when Insu walked through the door and shook hands with him. “Son Insu, if I remember correctly. So you’re the one that is going to be stealing my daughter away from me, huh?”

“We shouldn’t be scaring him that quickly,” I counter, grabbing onto Insu’s arm, marveling the muscles that tense underneath my grip, “And he isn’t stealing me if the Capitale wants it, is it?” My father sighs and smiles, and agrees that that is probably the truth.

The boys are awkward, but I guessed that I should have expected something like that between them. I smile, watching as my mother fusses over him, like she usually does. Before we walk into the living room to settle down, my father grabs my elbow and turns me so that I’m staring at him with curiosity.

He sighs, and I can see the wrinkles in his face and the stress from the past couple of months. The government chooses your job, so there shouldn’t be any chance of someone losing their jobs, but cuts need to be made, and my father knows this. The trips to different places around the country, to many different provinces, and everyone wondered if this was some type of test, to see if he was going to lose his job soon if he didn’t match up with code.

“Some match you have there,” he comments, “You know, I probably could put in a word to get you a new one, if this one turns out to be as weird as he seems.” I roll my eyes and hit his arm. “I’m serious, Yujin-ah, I’ll do it if you ask.” I knew he would say something like that, though.

“It’s fine, dad,” I answer, “Let’s just try to open him into our family with welcoming arms, okay?”

He sighs. “Fine.”

**

part two

hey y'all

mywookness — Mon, 29 Oct 2012 01:08:46 GMT

Ok, as many of you know, I am in FIVE Secret Santas this year. Yeah, pretty awesome Santa.

Because some of them are due under a month (super junior), I will be trying to get a lot of them done earlier than later, because I honestly don't know how my work flow will be for the next few months, because I do have four big courses (English, Civics and Careers, French and Math) this semester, and when December rolls around, it's just a month away from exams and so things are.. interesting. To keep myself from falling behind in my work, which is always the most important thing (I do have an average of 88% right now guys, don't fret, though), I may be spending nights perfecting essays instead of perfecting fanfictions.

Which is why I will be spending roughly a week and a half for each Secret Santa, depending on how much effort I will be putting into each fic. I do want to give a lot to who will be receiving the fic, so I will be trying for more than 3,000 words for each fic. The roughly week and a half will give me enough time to plan and write the fic, and also ship it up to a beta (which I will be needing - anyone open?), before starting on a new one and also keeping track of the school work that I am currently working on.

Now, seoufulness fills. There are unfortunately a lot of good ones this week, but the Super Junior one I am 1.5k into, so I will probably treat myself with doing a few this week, but I cannot predict how many I will be doing. Honestly, I want to get out of seoulfulness and maybe do one or two per week, and concentrate on some fics that I have tried to finish for so long now and certain challenges.

'Viva', the Yunho/Junsu chaptered fic, will be continuing. But seeing as it is ending in a month, I am not afraid of that entering my schedule, because the chapters are already planned out and just need to be typed. If need be, I will be posting more updates sooner, so that I can finish the update soon, so I can have the Sunday to just write whatever I need to write, or finish whatever homework. Thankfully, my French novel study (le Petit Prince) is finished, and my English novel study (To Kill a Mockingbird) will be finished soon!

I have this REALLY, REALLY BIG MBLAQ fic that I have been trying to write for such a damn long time, now, with Seungho/G.O as the main pairing and B2ST, as per usual. Post Apocalypse!AU ftw. Unfortunately, I have no idea how long it will be, or when I will post it. Right now, it's at 5k, and much to my dismay, it will probably not be finished until after 2013.

Now, depending on how long you've been my friend, you know that I usually go away for Christmas. This year is no exception! I have no idea if it is one week or two weeks this year, or if I will have Wi-Fi, but I can promise you that one week will be off. I would love a week at home so that I can finish the MBLAQ fic or the BTOB fic that I am currently writing, or the challenges, but my parents really, really like vacations.

Most of the due dates are the week of December 14th, so I may have that week before December to do some posting, depending on when my math exam is (there's rumours it's before Christmas break).

This week, I have no idea when though, I will be posting my femmebigbang, which is longer than my other big bangs, so I'm really excited to reveal it to you guys! It's a pairing that I have always wanted to explore, and so I'm happy that I got so far with this fic. Sometime this week, I will cross-post it, or you can go to femmebigbang and wait for when my fic is revealed!

And I guess that that's it, yeobos. There is a lot of shit that is going on for the next few months, and unfortunately, I won't be able to see you that much. But this semi-hiatus is one of the smartest decisions that I have ever made for myself and I am actually surprised with myself.

Your moddess,

Jules (Je)

viva two/six {yunho/junsu}

mywookness — Mon, 29 Oct 2012 00:29:37 GMT

Title: Viva Chapter Two - I Shook my Head at All the Questions Inside of Me
Fandom: DBSK
Pairings: Yunho-centric, Yunho/Junsu
Rating: PG-13
Warnings: slight homosexual stereotypes
Genre: Fluff, Romance, Humour
A/N: written for yjjyc More notes at the end. and forever!troll Jaejoong.
Summary: Jung Yunho is a rich, polite, perfect man. Kim Jaejoong is his obnoxious, and gay, best friend. Kim Junsu is a sultry, sexy and seductive man, that Yunho meets when Jaejoong brings him to a gay bar. Romance and humour ensues.

One - We Will Go Again

Jung Yunho hasn’t received that much sleep the night before. It shows as he sips his morning coffee, hissing at the bitterness of the all-black coffee. They had run out of milk at the office, and he had sent Yoochun to run out and get some for him, but he wasn’t completely sure that the hooligan would come back in the next year. Sometimes, to be completely honest, Yunho isn’t sure why he hired him in the first place.

He had sent all night typing up the paper that Yoochun had failed to type up, and was now facing the aftermath. His head pounded with a headache, even with the pills that he had popped into his mouth before heading off to work. Jaejoong had driven them to work, thankfully, and was even kind enough to keep the volume low to his Kara until they were at least half-way to work, when Yunho had stated that his headache wasn’t that bad. Unfortunately, after he had ‘stepped it up!’ Yunho’s head had started hurting tenfold.

He moved the paper that sat on his desk just a little bit, wondering if the paper was really worth the lack of sleep and his headache. Realistically—no. He was sure that if he hadn’t finished it his boss wouldn’t be that mad; he would just order Yoochun to finish it by the end of the day. By the way—where was Yoochun with his milk?

“Someone looks grumpy~” Overly-excited Jaejoong chirps, entering his office with the latte that he had purchased from the Starbucks downstairs, a splash of pumpkin sprinkles on the top because of the recent Thanksgiving. Yunho rolls his eyes, slamming his head down onto his desk. Now he really did want Yoochun to come back with the milk. He was sure that he was about to fall asleep any moment now. “But hey, come to think of it—the grumpy look makes you look pretty straight.”

“Really?” Yunho asks, snapping his head up from his desk. Jaejoong starts laughing and Yunho groans, throwing his head back down onto the wooden desk, making his computer screen wobble a little.

Jaejoong sits in one of his chairs, throwing his feet up onto his desk, clutching his stomach to keep himself from doubling over with laughter. “Come on bro, you know that it was just a joke!” Yunho doesn’t raise his head. “Why is this gay-straight thing so important for you, anyways?”

Why was it such a big thing for him? Well, during the night, when he was working on the paper that he had to turn in today, he couldn’t help but remember the smile against Kim Junsu’s lips, the way that his legs and ass moved in those leather pants, or the bright colour in his eyes as he leaned in so close that Jung Yunho could see every line on his beautiful face. He couldn’t get the feeling of his tongue running down his ear, breathing hot air into his ear canal and exciting him beyond belief. He knew that he didn’t get these feelings from Jaejoong, Yoochun or Changmin. Only those vixen eyes and high-pitched laugh got him to feel this way.

And no, this was not a good feeling. Especially when you were trying to stay concentrated. He’s surprised that he had finished the report in the first place. He was sure it wasn’t going to happen.

“Let him be,” a voice booms, and Jaejoong scrambles up to his feet, pardoning himself and rushing back into his office, almost forgetting his latte, or spilling it, in the process.

“Morning, Yunho,” his boss, Kim Youngwoon says, sauntering into his office, his hands stuffed into his pockets and his thumbs moving back and forth excitedly. Yunho stands up and bows and he can hear his boss’s laughter from above him. He’s known Youngwoon for most of his life—and while most people think that is why Yunho got the job in the first place, anyone that was close to either Youngwoon or Yunho would know that at work, it was strictly boss-worker.

“Where’s Yoochun, do you know? I’ve been tempted to talk to him about some changes,” Youngwoon asks, looking around Yunho’s office. They don’t talk that much, which is a good thing, mainly because Yunho doesn’t have that many slip-ups compared to the others. Jaejoong and Yunho worked in the same sector, mainly because it would mean that they would be getting home roughly at the same time.

Yunho was the numbers; Jaejoong was the thought cloud. Jaejoong’s thought process could only be described as ‘different’, the only reason why Youngwoon hired him in the first place after asking if Youngwoon’s pet fish that he kept in his office could juggle, and if they could, how much money he would sell them off for. He was the one that made the commercials, new products, and created the new outlook for a new company. Jaejoong didn’t sit in meetings, that was Yunho’s job. With Yoochun and Kibum, Yunho controlled the money flow in the building, and created monthly reports to display how the money was being spent.

They both recently moved back to Korea, which explained their closeness. Kibum was a hard-worker, though, and most of the time was working through math problems on his phone or finishing up a project. Yoochun was more zealous, and could be found chatting up the awkward, not social secretary out front—Shim Changmin. Their office was pretty small, because the bigger offices were farther south. This was where anything big went down, of course.

“He went out to buy milk,” Yunho said, pointing to the black coffee that sat next to him. Youngwoon raised his eyebrows and nodded slowly, turning on his ankle, about to leave. That was one of the things that Yunho appreciated about his boss. Unlike Jaejoong and Yoochun, the social butterflies, one could have a conversation with Youngwoon in less than six minutes and have every answer that you needed.

Youngwoon hummed, “Just tell him to stop by my office soon; again, I need to talk to him. And oh yeah, I got you a secretary without asking for your permission and stuff.” He waved it off. “He’ll be coming any minute now, too. So look presentable. Take some more headache pills. Looks pretty serious.” And then, he walked out of Yunho’s office.

Yunho is on pins-and-needles for the next hour.

To be perfectly honest, the last time he had had a secretary was three years ago, with a carefree girl who called herself Dana. He remembers her well because of her funnier name, and the fact that Yoochun was hitting on her twenty-four/seven, and eventually she left for a different building because of ‘not feeling safe in the work place’. Yunho did not want a replay of that at all, and so he pushed Yoochun out of the office again, asking for 1% milk instead of 2% just to buy some time. Yoochun had left with a sigh, but not before complaining to Changmin about his terrible life.

“He’s here~” Jaejoong chimes from across the way in his office. He could see much farther down the hall by how their offices were set up, and the giddiness in Jaejoong’s voice did not help with the unsettling feeling that had grown and had started moving around inside of his stomach. Jaejoong moves into Yunho’s line of sight and winks. No, not helping.

Yunho can hear the sound of the man’s shoes as he walks down the carpeted hallway towards his office. He stood up when he found that they were louder, closer. He smoothed down his hair, trying not to hair the snickers coming from Jaejoong’s office, and placed his hands down on his desk to try to look professional, even if he was shaking on the inside.

“Mr. Jung Yunho?” a high-pitched voice called, and he looked up from his notes on his desk to look at the person that had poked their head into his office. He almost dropped his jaw. Almost.

For the person that stands in front of his office is none other but the man that he had seen last night, dressed in red and black, that spark in his eyes and the words of sex and lust upon his glistening lips. That fox-like look hasn’t left his eyes, even if now he wears a suit, and his blonde hair is down, the tips brushing his brown eyes. He wears a gray suit and a red tie, with shiny work shoes, carrying a messenger bag over his shoulder.

“I guess my office is the one right beside yours?” Kim Junsu asks, a mischievous smirk placed on his lips.

--
end of chapter two.
a/n: forever troll jaejoong and yoochun. gosh, they will be sooooooooooo much funnnnnn
a/n1: just think of the f-u-t-u-r-e ~ you radiate like sunshine and my teddy bear at nighttime! dear juneeeeeeee!
a/n2: getting back to the music i used to listen to before k-pop. kind of scary.
a/n3: hey guess what guys, i actually updated on time!
a/n4: updated every sunday after seoulfulness fills
a/n5: join for faster updates

viva one/six {yunho/junsu}

mywookness — Mon, 22 Oct 2012 01:00:26 GMT

Title: Viva Chapter One - We Will Love Again
Fandom: DBSK
Pairings: Yunho-centric, Yunho/Junsu
Rating: PG-13
Warnings: slight homosexual stereotypes
Genre: Fluff, Romance, Humour
A/N: I am so sorry this took so long to write and get up! My humblest apologies to yjjyc for the wait, and thank you for writing such a wonderful plot! I do hope that this will be good enough for you in the end... More notes at the end.
Summary: Jung Yunho is a rich, polite, perfect man. Kim Jaejoong is his obnoxious, and gay, best friend. Kim Junsu is a sultry, sexy and seductive man, that Yunho meets when Jaejoong brings him to a gay bar. Romance and humour ensues.

“Let’s go to a gay bar, they said, it’ll be fun, they said,” Jung Yunho mutters underneath his breath as he scans around the hot, dark, pulsating room that he sits in.

For a gay bar, he had expected something less sultry. He would have expected dirty martinis, Barbra Streisand singing to not rain on her parade, and people walking up slowly and asking if someone would enjoy a drink, wiggling their eyebrows and starting up conversations in a higher pitched tone. This was a complete shock.

Bodies pressed against bodies, slick with the sweat of a thousand bodies, the sky illuminated with streaks of blues, pinks, yellows and purples. Alcohol was passed from one person to the next, sips of wine and beer taken by a million different pairs of lips. People shimmy their bodies to not musicals that starred Hugh Jackson but actually modern day music, and Yunho is sure that this is some mixed-up, remixed Abracadabra that they are currently listening to.

Yunho grabs onto the bar like a lost child. In some ways, this was the truth, as Kim Jaejoong had disappeared; joining the throng of people that meshed together in an action that Yunho would carefully name “dancing”. He could not see the red-haired man through the group of people as some had pink, purple, green or blue hair, with many different lengths, and even though Jaejoong was a pretty tall man (not as tall as Yunho was, but tall still), he was still covered through the shroud of humanly and homosexual desire.

A man like Jung Yunho should not be here. He had a meeting at ten tomorrow morning, and he still had to get that report written up before that, and he was pretty sure that even if he texted Yoochun, demanding to do it for him, that the nerd would be watching Sherlock or Star Trek instead. Yunho was a nice man that enjoyed Jaejoong’s presence, and would never hate him for his preferences, but Yunho deemed it too far when Jaejoong brought him to a gay bar, when he was one-hundred percent straight.

“You look pissed,” Jaejoong says, looking him up and down and sitting down at the bar beside him, asking the bartender to get him something else by a name that Yunho has never heard of before. Jaejoong thanks the bartender with a smile and sips at his drink before turning to Yunho, who continues to glare at him.

“This is a gay bar. You brought me to a gay bar,” Yunho explains, “So of course I would be pissed.”

Jaejoong rolls his eyes, slamming his hand down onto the bar. A few people look at him as he starts laughing hysterically. Yunho sighs and grabs onto Jaejoong’s arm. “You’re drunk,” he says, “Go home Jaejoong, you’re drunk.”

“Awn, I would have wanted you to stay for just a little bit longer,” a voice purrs from behind them, and Yunho turns to see who it is exactly. His stomach drops.

First of all, he’s wearing all skinny, tight leather. Ok, mostly leather, like his black, leather pants, that stick to his gorgeous thighs and run down to his calves, where yes, they do still stick deliciously, and to his army boots, tied up with red laces. His jacket is leather, too, broadening his shoulders and a tight red t-shirt is underneath, and Yunho is pretty sure that he can see nipples from underneath the fabric. His hair is a delicious platinum blonde, and he can see the purplish-blue contacts shining underneath the party lights.

“Kim Junsu,” he introduces, “And I like you.” He licks his lips slowly, bringing his thumb up to his lips and running it over his mouth, wiping away the access lipstick that collects at the side of his lips. Yunho swallows hard—because Junsu is looking right at him, and that does nothing to make him feel any better, thank you.

“I’m sorry, I’m not g-gay, I’m straight, and I have a g-girlfriend…” Yunho stutters, trying his best to get as far away from Junsu as possible, as he has now taken a step closer, pulling himself away from the group of people that just seem to get bigger that dance behind him.

“He’s lying, he’s never had a girlfriend in his life,” Jaejoong intersects, inspecting his nails. Yunho turns to his best friend and roommate, throwing daggers out of his eyes, and Yunho desperately wishes that looks could kill, because Jaejoong’s best friend routine is really, really not helping. This is not the time where Yunho wants him to be his wingman.

Junsu laughs, and Yunho turns to him, surprised to hear such an interesting laugh for a man that looks undeniably sexy in such outfit, if Yunho was gay, of course. “Not gay my ass,” he says, inching closer and closer to Yunho, smiling as the man wiggles into his seat, tapping Jaejoong’s hand in a vain attempt to get Jaejoong to protect him, as best friends are supposed to do (right?).

Jaejoong doesn’t seem to notice as Junsu sits down on Yunho’s lap, and Yunho is still surprised about how Junsu was able to get on his lap in the first place. He runs his fingers down Yunho’s tanned face, leaning in and whispering softly into Yunho’s ear, “I’ll fuck you, outside, now. And don’t do the, “I’m not gay” routine, I’ve made all good boys go bad.” Junsu grabs onto Yunho’s hands, and runs his tongue up the side of Yunho’s left ear.

“Ok, ok that’s it!” Yunho says, politely pushing Junsu off and dragging Jaejoong off, spilling the drink in his hand over. They rush out, and Yunho is sure that he must have committed a crime with all of the club-goers that he must have pushed over. “I’m sorry, I’m sorry,” he mumbled under his breath as he made his way through the club, finally smelling almost clean, fresh air, and freedom.

Jaejoong pouts all the way to Yunho’s parked car, a few blocks away. The clothes he’s wearing is barely appropriate for November, rubbing his arms as they walk down to the car, his shoes going ‘clomp, clomp’ as he tries to catch up to Yunho, who is almost in a run by now.

“It took me a very long time to get into that bar, you know,” Jaejoong comments when they get into Yunho’s car, and Yunho fishes his car keys out of his pocket. Yunho does a wonderful job at ignoring him, putting his keys into the ignition and starting the car, not surprised when some Girl’s Generation starts playing through. Jaejoong just happens to raise the volume.

“I should have gotten that guy’s number, to be honest. Kim Junsu, that seems like a popular name, doesn’t it? It might be hard to find him, then,” Jaejoong says to himself, pulling out a piece of paper from the glove box and writing down Kim Junsu on the paper.

“Can we stop talking about him?” Yunho asks, pulling to a stop at an intersection. At the middle of the night, there aren’t that any people out, just a few other cars that keep them company. He rubs his face with his hands, breathing into his palms, trying desperately to get the image of Junsu’s vixen glance out of his head, or the feel of his tongue moving up his ear. It felt almost like a cat’s, like sandpaper…

Jaejoong giggles, but shuts up eventually when Yunho turns and glances at him, raising his palms up in defense. “But seriously, a girlfriend? You are the worst guy to play straight.”

“I would like to remind you of Jiyeon, back in seventh grade, thank you very much,” Yunho says, “We dated for a total of six weeks, which is a lot longer than you’ve ever dated anyone.”

“Didn’t she like me?” Jaejoong asks, “Green light.”

Yunho rolls his eyes and continues driving. “She liked you, yes, but you’re gay, remember? You knocked her down as quickly as humanly possible.” He flips a strand of hair from his eyelids, sighing. Jiyeon was a very pretty girl, as Yunho remembered, and he was rather positive that she was in musicals or movies, now.

“Dude, if anyone looked you up, they’d think you’re gay,” Jaejoong said, “You’re very well dressed, you cook reasonably well, well enough for Changmin at least, you’re always buying expensive stuff, you have only ever had one girlfriend ever and that was before you were fourteen, and you just went to a gay bar.”

“That my friend forced me to go to!” Yunho argues. The car falls to silence.

“Am I really that gay-looking?” Yunho asks, his fingertips tapping against the steering wheel. Jaejoong laughs and taps his shoulder.

“You’re fine, Jung Yunho, just don’t go to anymore gay bars.” He winks, and climbs out of the car, heading up to the elevator of their building.

Yunho sighs, closing the door to the car and following him. He’s about to open the door to the elevator room when his phone buzzed, and he unlocks his phone to check the text.

Hey boss~ <3
yeah, Minnie needed my help tonight!
unfortunately, couldn’t get that report done…
you can finish it tonight, right?
i love you <33
- Yoochun

He sighs again, not even bothering to text back.

--
end of chapter one.
a/n: i am again, deeply sorry that this took so long! i hope that yjjyc enjoys this first part!
a/n1: i am guessing to update this every sunday, after posting up my seoulfulness fills for the week
a/n2: join for faster updates
a/n3: viva is a favorite song. that is why i am dedicating this fic to this song

standing in front of my desperate self and praying {xiumin}

mywookness — Sun, 07 Oct 2012 01:12:58 GMT

standing in front of my desperate self and praying
xiumin-centric, xiumin/sehun, kris/chanyeol
angst ; r
major themes of homophobia, character death and suicides with coarse language
for the prompt i for aideshou's fifth challenge and 1/101 of the exo challenge - xiumin/sehun; closet

One night, Minseok dreams of a door.

It’s such a plain door, painted white and clean, like no one has ever grasped the doorknob and pulled it open. It has just sat in the darkness, waiting for someone to open it and it to lead the person to a whole new world.

Minseok wakes up before he can actually open that door, and realizes when he wakes up, that his closet door is the same one—rarely used, no scratches, and just waiting for someone to step through and walk into it.

**

The first time he has any boy on boy action is when he’s five and at a friend’s birthday party. Minseok is not particularly skilled in the interaction department, and finds it hard to socialize with any of the boys except for his friend, Lu Han, a boy that recently moved from China. Lu Han has a lot of friends, from many different ages, and Minseok isn’t surprised to see that there is a large flock of people behind Lu Han when Minseok arrives at his birthday party, a box in his hand and worry in his eyes.

“You should try to talk to other people,” Lu Han suggests when Minseok sits in the corner, eating some puffy and cheesy chips by himself, watching as everyone enjoys themselves. Lu Han grabs his cheesy hand and pulls him through the crowd and they stop in front of a pair of taller boys who Minseok later on learns are named Kris and Chanyeol. They both smile when Lu Han appears in front of them, but slowly their faces morph and transform when they see Minseok, standing beside him.

“This is Minseok,” Lu Han introduces, never lacking in confidence. Kris and Chanyeol nods, as if they have already had many meet-ups with Lu Han’s new friends, and this is just someone else. Lu Han pushes Minseok to the couple, and leaves him to find the celebrity of the party who has been named as ‘Kim Jongin’.

Chanyeol is a year younger, but Kris is the same age, and that makes Minseok suddenly calmer. He sits with the two cross-legged, marveled by the length of both of their legs. They stood roughly at the same height—Kris was just a little bit taller. Minseok was suddenly curious, wondering what it must have been like to be that tall, walk on such long legs. But he kept his mouth shut, because it was so much more interesting to watch Chanyeol and Kris interact.

Chanyeol whispered something into Kris’s ear when Lu Han ended up falling on Jongin, which resulted in a flurry of apologies and laughter from everyone but the two. Kris laughed at whatever Chanyeol had said; and Minseok noticed that small glimmer of happiness that seems to shine in Kris’s eyes. Minseok likes that, and finds their interactions much more interesting than Lu Han’s.

Kris soon realizes that Minseok has been watching them for the past twenty minutes, and taps Chanyeol’s arm. Their expressions quickly harden and they scoot away from each other, forcing Minseok to pout, putting his hands into his lap and biting down on his lip, hard.

“You don’t have to stop,” Minseok says, “I was just rather interested in what you were doing. I’m sorry. I’ve just never seen guys act like that around each other like that, is all.” He keeps his head down, humiliation circulating in his veins. He should have not been gawking like an idiot; he should have been a nice person and continued watching Lu Han. It was Lu Han’s party, after all.

Chanyeol giggles, “Thank you, Minseok-hyung. It’s just surprising to see people that are as accepting as you are about it.”

Minseok doesn’t understand what Chanyeol meant then, but understands much later on.

**

When Minseok dreams of the door again the next night, he sees a rope attached to the doorknob. Such a silly place to have a rope, he thinks. Unlike the pristine door, the rope looks rotten and used, like it was from an old boat or the docks, and he is sure that there is blood against the inside of the rope. Otherwise, it is fairly strong, like it could lift up a piano or something similar.

Minseok extends his hand out to touch the rope, but when his fingers brush against the harsh texture, his hands turn dull and gray, and he loses the feeling in his feet. He crumples down onto the nothingness’s floor, clutching his gray hands. The rope flies up and wraps around his neck, until he’s choking, choking—choking to death.

He wakes up panting, tears streaming down his face.

**

One of the main reasons why Minseok doesn’t make that many friends is because he’s chubby most of his life. He gets picked on by the older grades for his fact, losing his lunches “because he doesn’t need it!” and eventually starving himself. He slowly realizes how much he hates his body, and tries to get to many sports teams, like the soccer team or the football team, to try to gain some muscle and erase the fat that has stuck to his body since he was a baby.

He never loses his body fat, even with all the work he does to try to slim down. By thirteen, he’s still a little chubby, and his body just feels disproportioned. His parents tell him that he’ll grow soon, and when he’s finished growing, he’ll look fine. Minseok doesn’t want to wait until he’s eighteen, though. He wants to look good now—or there is no point to doing all that he’s been doing. His parents sigh and buy him some protein shakes, like he asked.

The protein shakes taste awful when it slides down his throat but he toughens up and drinks three a day instead of eating. The results are minimal and they don’t show when he stands in front of the mirror, even if Lu Han tells him cheerily that there are some improvements (“absolutely!”). Minseok knows that that is easy for Lu Han to say—he’s been the same weight for five years, now, and has been graced with the best metabolism in the world.

“I don’t even know why you waste your time losing weight,” Lu Han says, munching down on some French fries in front of Minseok, who begrudgingly swallows down his protein shake. “If you’re doing this to please yourself, you need to a whole bunch more, because you’re never happy.” Lu Han doesn’t let Minseok complain, though—simply raises a hand and shrugs. “So, why are you doing it?”

Minseok crumples again. “I don’t know… It’s just that Jongin is very popular, and he’s really athletic and he dances, so I thought that if I got more muscles and lost this body fat, people would stop bullying me and I would be able to get more friends in the process. That’s why people make fun of me in the first place. I want to show them.”

Lu Han rolls his eyes and places his hand on Minseok’s, “All you have to do is be you. Sure, you may be a little chubby, but that’s all natural! You just need to put yourself out there, and people will like you. I’m your only friend, that makes you a target for bullies.”

Minseok’s chin shakes. Lu Han can state his opinion quickly, he has realized, and maybe that’s why a lot of people find him so entertaining. Minseok sometimes wonders why he’s friends with him anyways; he could probably find some good people without having known Lu Han in the first place. The week that Lu Han goes to China explains to him why; he really misses Lu Han.

**

Byun Baekhyun is Minseok’s next-door-neighbour. They’re rather close in age, and so, his parents usually have pushed them together when it came to play-dates or baby-sitting. Baekhyun is younger, but he is way more outspoken than Minseok is, and he is reminded of Lu Han whenever Baekhyun says something that Minseok would never dare to say. His brown hair and eye-smile has made him very popular at his school, according to him—he doesn’t go to the same school as Minseok or Lu Han do, even if Lu Han already somehow knows who Baekhyun is.

It is one of their baby-sitting days when Minseok’s parents are away to go watch a movie and have a nice date when Minseok is six and Baekhyun is five and a half. Baekhyun has the glamorous life with a pool in his backyard and a sandbox to play in to give off a beach feeling. Because Minseok is too self-conscious to even take his shirt off and swim in the water, they settle for playing in the sandbox, which according to Baekhyun, is much better anyways.

“My father was talking about homos last night,” Baekhyun says, scooping more sand to the bucket in order to help with the walls of the sand castle they have decided to construct with the two hours they have on their hands before dinner. He says it so nonchalantly and Minseok barely catches what he says because of it.

“What are homos?” Minseok asks.

Baekhyun beckons him to come closer, looking around to make sure that no one is around them, before cupping Minseok’s ear. “It’s guys that like guys,” he whispers into his ear, before backing away, checking their surroundings again. Minseok furrows his brow.

“What’s so bad about…homos?” Minseok asks, trying to remember the word in question. “I like you, are you’re a guy, aren’t you? I like Lu Han, too, and he’s a guy-”

Baekhyun rolls his eyes and slaps the side of Minseok’s head. “Not like, like like! Of course I like you and I like Joonmyeon, too, but homos like like other guys! That’s just not natural!” Baekhyun seems flabbergasted at the simple notion of ‘homos’. Minseok, on the other hand, doesn’t understand.

“But Kris and Chanyeol…” Minseok starts.

‘It’s just surprising to see people that are as accepting as you are about it.’

He decides that it’s better to just keep his mouth shut. Baekhyun rolls his eyes, noticing that their sandcastle has now been ruined by their little storytelling.

“Why isn’t it natural, though?” Minseok asks, trying to fix the damage that has been done to the sandcastle by refilling one of the buckets. Baekhyun slaps his hand, as if to say, ‘pay attention!’

Baekhyun sighs, “It isn’t natural, is all! Guys are supposed to be with girls, that’s how it was supposed to be! My dad said that it was because of how we men are made.” Minseok’s eyes widen. How men were made? Like in the tummy made? He looked down at his lap.

If it wasn’t natural, why did it look like Kris and Chanyeol look like they were having so much fun at Lu Han’s birthday party? And at any of the other times that Minseok had run into them? It didn’t make any sense! They seemed to like each other a lot—it didn’t matter if they were both guys. He pouted. He was tempted to ask Baekhyun this, but if he didn’t know, maybe it was better if they didn’t know.

“So you shouldn’t become a homo, or you’ll be going against nature, ok?” Baekhyun forces Minseok to pinky-swear before they can go inside and have a snack, and by this time Minseok’s stomach is rumbling, desperate for food because one of the bullies had stolen his lunch.

Thankfully for Minseok, Baekhyun forgets about that pinky-swear.

**

One night, Minseok dreams of the door again. This time, there is no rope. There is nothing. Just a door and the cowardice attached to it. Again, Minseok doesn’t dare open it. He’s too afraid of what had happened the last time he had tried to open the door to ever do it again. So he backs away and starts running until he eventually wakes up.

**

By a dramatic turn of events, Minseok starts hanging around Kris and Chanyeol more often than Lu Han or Baekhyun. The two don’t mind him following them around, and almost find it adorable. Minseok finds Lu Han to be to blunt lately, and Baekhyun is snappy, whilst Kris and Chanyeol are so much nicer and calm, even with Kris’s deep, glaring eyes.

It’s when he’s thirteen years old when he finally asks the question. He now knows the difference between homosexual and heterosexual and he knows the difference between normal and different. This is why Kris and Chanyeol are so interesting, so fresh, to Minseok—they don’t fit the normal code, and in this way, it’s warming. It’s nice.

“Are you two gay?” he asks when they sit in Chanyeol’s room. Kris and Chanyeol enjoy listening to rap music, a type of music that Minseok is not one-hundred-percent fond of, but will deal with to be around the two others. Kris’s head snaps up and he stares at Chanyeol before turning to Minseok. Minseok crumples back at the force of Kris’s gaze.

Kris stands up, “Who told you?” Chanyeol grabs Kris’s arm and pulls him back down onto the carpeted floor, brushing some of his dyed blonde hair from his eyes, giving him a short smile before smiling brightly at Minseok.

“I-I… I learned it by myself. I’m sorry. You two are just so very close. I didn’t want to make you mad, Kris,” Minseok apologizes as quickly as possible, so fast that he’s sure that he forgot some words while delivering the message.

Kris sighs, “You’re pretty smart then, Minseok-hyung.” Minseok shrugs, biting his lip. “But you do realize that you cannot tell anyone, right?”

“People like us aren’t necessarily accepted. That’s why we’re just going to finish high school, and then we’re going to run away to Canada, where we can get accepted. I’m sorry, but this is just a terrible place for people like Kris and I,” Chanyeol explains.

“I wish you guys didn’t have to leave,” Minseok admits. Kris smiles and hits Minseok’s arm playfully.

“We do have so much longer, though! It’s fine!”

Minseok smiles.

“Do you really think he’ll keep it?” Chanyeol asks when Minseok leaves to go back home. Kris shrugs.

“If he knew for so long, now, and didn’t tell anyone—I doubt he’ll tell anyone now.”

**

Soon he starts realizing what Kris and Chanyeol meant about ‘being accepted.’

Minseok is researching for a project when he hears about a suicide. He’s heard about suicides before; some comes from stress, some from bullying, and some from depression. He knows that his teacher isn’t looking over his shoulder, so he clicks on the article, and starts reading.

The article talks about a boy that upon coming out as a homosexual, was beat up incessantly and called terrible things simply because of his sexual orientation. The teachers, nor the parents of the children, did anything, because they had thought that what the children were doing was right, and with just the right about of pressure, the kid would eventually return to being heterosexual. The boy threw himself off the bridge because of all of things he had been dealing with.

Minseok was flabbergasted—but then there were the comments. People agreed with the parents! His stomach suddenly felt sick.

The next period, he ran to Chanyeol’s locker and trapped him into a wide hug, grabbing onto his sides as hard as he possibly could. He didn’t realize he was crying until the fabric of Chanyeol’s shirt suddenly became wet. Chanyeol bent down a little bit more (Chanyeol had grown much faster than Minseok had) and hugged him back, ruffling the ends of Minseok’s hair. They’re missing class but such things don’t matter.

“What is it, Minseok-hyung?” Chanyeol asks with his joyful tone, handing him a tissue to wipe his face. “There must be a very good reason for you to be crying.” Minseok smiles a little at this, and Chanyeol deems that enough. “Tell me at lunch, ok? I’m sure Kris would like to know as well.”

When it’s time to tell the story, Minseok feels suddenly too sick to eat. After joining Chanyeol and Kris’s party, they refused to watch him drown in protein shakes, so much that they started dragging him out of school during lunch to buy him fast food until he got the gist of it, and started eating well again. When Kris notices that Minseok isn’t eating—he knows that something is up.

“What’s wrong?” Kris asks Chanyeol. Chanyeol sighs; flipping some of his longer, black hair out of his glasses and squishes Minseok’s cheek.

“Something bad happened in one of his classes that he actually ran over to me and started crying, poor hyung,” Chanyeol explains, “I told him to wait until lunch so that he could tell both of us.” Minseok scrunches his lips together and presses his thumbs together.

“I was researching things online for one of my classes and I found a newspaper article. It was so terrible. It was of a boy that was harassed because of, you know, and he eventually just killed himself because of it! And I don’t even know why people would do that. You should be allowed to love whoever you want to love, right? Why does it matter? You guys are cool; you shouldn’t be pushed to your deaths!”

Kris smiles, reaching over and squeezing Minseok’s shoulder. “Minseok-hyung, you are more intelligent at the age of fourteen than many people are at the age of eighty-five.” He winks, and Minseok’s heart swells. “I promise you, we won’t be stoned by our fellow classmates. But if you are ever in danger from being friends with us, please, I wouldn’t make you stay.”

Minseok nibbles on one of his pieces of carrot, “But I’d want to stand up with you guys. It isn’t fair.”

Chanyeol smiles wisely. “Yes, it isn’t fair at all.”

**

This is not the first thing that Minseok learns about real-life homophobia. Unfortunately, it spans for more than just homosexuals, and Minseok quickly realizes that soon, he’ll be standing up for more than just one type of group. He researches about suicides relating to homophobia, youth lines and organizations that are willing to help if you are in that particular position. In South Korea, there aren’t as many as there are in United States, and he wonders how many people are stuck in the closet because of this.

Minseok once asked Chanyeol, when they were lying in his backyard, if Kris and him were in the closet. Chanyeol sighed through his eyes, stretching his hand out so that the clouds served as a backdrop to his long, beautiful fingers. They sat in silence for a very long time, and Minseok was afraid that Chanyeol had fallen asleep when he finally replied.

“I don’t call it ‘in the closet’ if you have finally agreed to it yourself. It was four when I became rather quite interested in Kris, but it was only when I was twelve and I started understanding many different other things that I finally realized that I was gay. It isn’t as big as the movies make it out to be. Honestly, I was watching porn one afternoon with a girl and a guy, and I found nothing attractive about big, bouncy breasts or that little cavern where a dick’s supposed to go inside. I didn’t believe it, that that was natural. It just looked brutish to me.

“Then Kris and I started getting closer and I started noticing how closely I was…inspecting him? Ha, I guess that’s the best way I can describe it without making it sound gross for you,” he explained, “It was when he came over one time that he figured out I was gay, and then it just sort of unraveled from there. At first, I had thought that Kris wouldn’t be my friend afterwards because I had come out, and had told him there was an interest there. Kris was nonchalant, as he typically is, and told me that he would be interested in dating me too. And that’s pretty much how it happened.

“Because we both are gay and we acknowledge the fact that we are gay, there’s no reason why anyone else really needs to know. Being gay, bi, trans or two-spirited, that doesn’t matter, it just matters that you have realized that that is the truth. And sadly, there are a lot of people that just walk the world not giving in to their real feelings, and marrying some girl they don’t even love. It’s pitiful, actually. But yeah, no one but you and your lover needs to really know your feelings. You can say, but sometimes it is not the best. To be honest, Kris and I weren’t going to tell anyone. You just happened to find out.”

Minseok sighed, and they settled into a peaceful silence, watching the clouds race past them on the summery day before year nine. He finally swallowed, turned onto his side, and stared deep into Chanyeol’s dark eyes.

“I think I might be gay,” he admits. Chanyeol sits up and Minseok mimics him, placing his fidgety hands in his lap. He can feel Chanyeol’s eyes on him so he looks down in his lap, but he grabs Minseok’s face and forces him to look up so that their eyes meet.

“You don’t have to do this just because we’re gay, it’s fine, really,” Chanyeol says, “If you’re just doing this to feel normal in our group, you don’t have to. You can be straight and we’ll be perfectly fine with it.” Minseok’s heart is crushed but he understands. He would have probably reacted the same way. He nods.

“But I do think I am gay. You guys made me start thinking, too. I’ve never really found the great things about girls, they’re just annoying and I can’t find a good way to really communicate with them. I’m much more comfortable with guys—and guys topless are pretty awesome.” Chanyeol and Minseok laugh into the air, but promise to each other that their conversation never leaves this yard. Only Kris is allowed to know.

And that promise is never forgotten.

**

The beginning of high school introduces a boy named Oh Sehun. He’s as clumsy as it comes, and unfortunately, Jongin takes him under his wing.

Sehun is automatically liked by everyone because he can make people laugh and smile, and that makes everyone happy when they’re surrounded by such gloomy things like the beginning of some of the hardest years of your life (the all-cursed high school). He’s also rather cute, with his small habit of biting down on his lip when he’s scared or nervous, and with the amount of times that he runs into teachers and other people, that happens often.

Kris doesn’t like him for some strange reason, so for the first half of the year, Minseok doesn’t see that much of this Sehun character. Yes, he hears a lot about him, especially from Lu Han, who for some strange reason still keeps in touch with him on a bi-weekly basis, and his other classmates. Plus, if someone was actually able to pull off their ugly yellow uniform, he would have to see him, yes?

The first time that Minseok and Sehun are formally introduced is at a party thrown by Lu Han when Minseok is on the cusp of turning fifteen. Kris and Chanyeol have magically “disappeared”, and Lu Han hasn’t found someone to entertain Minseok for the amount of time that his friends will be “away”, so he sits on one of the chairs, drinking from a red cup something that is supposed to be pop but has the distinct taste of alcohol instead.

“Hey.”

Minseok looks up to see Sehun, smiling down at him. It’s weird, seeing him out of his school uniform. He’s seen Kris and Chanyeol, and obviously Lu Han, but because Sehun lives on the other side of their town, he doesn’t have the chance to really see him in normal clothes. He wears a pair of gray jeans with a flat red top, and he’s surprised that it actually works that well—but Minseok is sure by now that Sehun can pull off any look without trying.

“Is the seat next to you taken?” Sehun asks, and Minseok is able to pick up just the slightest hint of an accent buried underneath that lisp of his. Minseok giggles into his cup, drinking down more of the alcohol, coughing as it burns down his throat. Sehun sits down beside him on the row of chairs, watching as people mingle around them, and they sit, oblivious to the rest of the world.

“I’m Oh Sehun,” he introduces, extending his hand. Minseok shakes his hand, marveling over the fact that Sehun’s hands are so soft compared to the harsh brittle he’s used to from Lu Han and Chanyeol. Minseok smiles inwardly, wondering if he would come off as too weird if he asked Sehun what kind of hand cream he used “because your skin is just divine!”

“Kim Minseok.” Sehun seems to be happy with that name, because he repeats it and circles it around in his mouth, trying to say it a few more times. Minseok finds this completely adorable, tucking his fidgety hands between his legs as he watches Sehun bite down on his lip. He quickly realizes that that biting the lip habit will slowly get to him. “So, are you a friend of the bride or the groom?”

Oh right, Jongin helped with the party, too, Minseok thinks. Out of the two options, Minseok decides that Lu Han is probably the bride, seeing as he looks like a girl sometimes and he certainly has the weight for a girl. “If Lu Han is the bride, than the bride,” Minseok replies, just because he isn’t sure. Sure, Jongin is the embodiment of manliness with pulsating biceps, strong thighs and underarm hair, Sehun might consider the fact that Jongin still watches kid’s television on a weekly basis as a rather feminine thing to do.

(Yes, Minseok had made a little portfolio for Jongin, but learned that his arrogance would eventually blow him to bits—plus he was pretty much certain he was dating Soojung, a girl from their school.)

Sehun laughs, “Yeah, that’s the bride. Jongin’s manliness would hurt if we ever called him a girl.” He looks nice laughing, Minseok deducts, with the way his lips turn up and his eyes close just slightly. Slowly, Minseok started counting all the things that he did like about Sehun. Right now, he didn’t seem to be like Kris had predicted, he seemed to be a pretty nice guy.

“But I bet he’d probably look pretty sweet as a girl, if you dressed him up,” Minseok comments, watching as Lu Han accidentally pushes into Jongin again, and half-wonders if this will be a replay of Lu Han’s five-year old party those many moons ago.

Sehun raises an eyebrow, “To be honest, I bet you’re right about that one.” Minseok holds his breath—did he go too out there? Did Sehun know? He swallowed the lump in his throat, trying his best not to make his thighs shake. “I did hear that you’ve been going to school with him for a very long time, so you probably know a lot about him—like if he is good in drag.” Minseok starts breathing again.

“I honestly don’t know that much about him, even if I have spent most of my life with him in my classes,” Minseok admits, “Lu Han and I are pretty close, but I’m really friends with Kris and Chanyeol more.” He’s used to seeing people gawk at him for a very seconds, wondering how someone like him had managed to befriend some of the most unapproachable people in the school, with his chubby cheeks and his short body.

“That’s cool. Those two guys seem like pretty awesome people. So you must be awesome then, right?” Sehun asks, and Minseok is sure that his face is beaming—the way that his lips turn up when he smiles or the way that his face seems to just glow underneath the bad lighting of the party. It’s actually surprising to see someone look so desirable in such a place, so Minseok smiles back.

“You should really smile more,” Sehun suggests, reaching over and pinching one of Minseok’s cheeks, “You have an adorable dimple when you do.”

Minseok spends the rest of the night looking into the reflection of his phone and trying to find out the perfect smile to showcase his dimple. When he’s found it, he promises to himself that he’ll try to smile this way every day to make Sehun see his bright smile every day, and his dimple.

**

Minseok meets up with Sehun more often when Sehun by accident ends up being part of the dance club after school, a hobby that Minseok has picked up so that he can sweat off the fat between his legs and make firmer thighs and arms in the process. He isn’t as good as Yixing or as Jongin who are the lead of the class most of time and sticks to Lu Han because of it; but he enjoys moving his body around and working on various steps whilst covered in a sheer layer of sweat. It’s better than Kris and Chanyeol, who are loyal members to the go-home club for five years, now.

Sehun is peer-pressured into joining by Lu Han and Jongin, but it’s Minseok that forces him to stay. And stay they do, spending hours after school in one of the practice rooms, dancing off a routine that Jongin and Yixing were able to master in the first few minutes whilst Minseok takes more time to understand. Sehun is talent and Minseok enjoy his one-on-one training sessions.

“You aren’t that bad, to be honest,” Sehun pants when they are in the room, watching their reflections through the large window right in front of them. Minseok rolls his eyes.

“Thanks,” he mumbles and Sehun laughs. He grabs onto Minseok’s shoulder and throws him down onto the ground. Minseok grabs onto Sehun’s wrist and pulls him down with him, until they are a giggling mess on the floor, their hair greasy and their grins huge.

“I enjoy this a lot,” Sehun says, watching the ceiling. Minseok is forced to take it another way.

**

Minseok dreams of the doors. But this time, it’s open. He takes a step closer and looks inside. He sees a violent, turbulent ocean, one that he is sure that no one woul ever be able to cross. He’s splashed by some water, the salt water sinking into his bones.

He grabs onto the doorknob in order to close it, but the wind is too strong and he’s thrown into the waves before he has the chance. He can’t do anything to stop it.

The word is already out.

**

“You know, people have been pointing fingers,” Kris says when they[‘re walking to their next class. Minseok raises an eyebrow.

“What are you talking about?”

“Just stop hanging around Sehun so much, okay? People are starting to say bad things about you and you are being so oblivious to it!” Kris grabs Minseok’s collar and pushes him against the lockers. “I’m protecting you Minseok, but if you step out of line because of Sehun, I can’t help you as much as you may think I can.”

Kris lets go and finds Chanyeol instead of going to his next class.

**

Sehun has a girlfriend.

It stabs him right in the heart when he learns the truth, that he has been dating a girl named Choi Jinri for the past few weeks. He doesn’t know why in the world he would actually believe that something like this could actually be possible, but he knows that he is just a damn fool for actually believing that someone like Sehun could actually be there for him, and that the times that they had spent together actually meant more for him that Minseok knew they actually did.

He doesn’t tell Kris or Chanyeol, he doesn’t tell anyone. He just gets up early in the morning, locks himself in the closet, and with a rope that he had found in his garage the night before, does the same thing many kids before him had done.

Only Chanyeol and Kris really know the real reason, holding the rope that kept him locked in the closet.

Sehun is devastated, obviously he is. He doesn't know the fully story, but he knows that he has something to do with it, which makes his stomach do flip-flops. He wants to just stop time, go back to when he still knew that Minseok was alive and stop this.

How nice it would be if he had extended his hand for help.

--
end.
a/n: again, the ending was lazy.
a/n1: love for all the families affected by homophobia. a lot of the stories i've read were placed into the story to make it work so well.
a/n2: if you liked this fic, make sure to vote for it on October 14th at aideshou!
a/n3: title taken from the korean version of angel by exo.

panda ice cream {tao/sehun}

mywookness — Fri, 14 Sep 2012 00:05:21 GMT

panda ice cream
tao/sehun (with mentions of others)
fluff ; pg-13
mentions of sex, coarse language, heavy use of sarcasm
written as entry 26 in sncj_reversebb's 2012 reverse big bang art: here

“Panda?”

Sehun looks up from texting Jongin to see a man with jet-black hair and eyes that could easily scare anyone. He takes a step back, raising an eyebrow, mainly because he hadn’t heard what the customer had said—he rarely does. Jongin has a cruel habit of texting him when he’s working—that’s quality friendship for you—and there aren’t that many customers during his shift of 1pm to 4pm, so usually, he can text his bro and not have people complaining.

“Panda?” the man repeats, pointing at the sign that hangs above the cashier, where in big, baby blue bubble letters, the word ‘Panda’ is written in English. Sehun already knows what it looks like from having passed the little shop for most of his life on the way to school, and then when he was sixteen, finally applying for a job at the small ice cream shop.

“Yep, this is the ‘Panda Ice Cream Parlour’,” Sehun explained, tilting his head to the side and going his aegyo—because supposedly, according to Joonmyeon, aegyo always worked. The customer cocked his head to the side with him, frowning, and Sehun stands back upright—because even if aegyo works, he still looks like an idiot doing it.

“Murderers!” the customer screams at the top of his lungs, pointing at Sehun and giving him a look like he just killed his mother and first born child. Sehun steps back, raising his hands, and he’s sure that his eyes are the size of Kyungsoo’s right now, and if they aren’t, then they must be really close, because his eyelids feel like they’re being ripped apart.

“What?” Sehun asks, and he can feel Kyungsoo slapping the back of his head and asking him where his manners came from.

The customer screams, “How dare you kill and eat panda! They are going extinct and nevertheless, you go out and kill panda only for people to eat! That is murder! You should be killed, hung, stabbed, maimed, and destroyed, just like panda goes through every, single day! How dare you!”

Sehun forgets to blink, and he’s pretty sure that the seven customers in the café are all watching them, now.

“We don’t eat panda here,” Sehun explains once he’s finally regained his breath, “Pandas are sweet, adorable and cuddly creatures—and that’s what we wanted our customers to feel like once they step in, and once they try our ice cream. Sweet, adorable, and cuddly. I’m sorry if you took it the wrong way—we were actually, um, appreciating and complimenting the panda.”

This seems to calm down the customer, as he orders a strawberry ice cream and mocha latte to go, before exiting the café with his sunglasses perched on his nose, and the rest of the customers all watching him walk out.

“Whoa,” a frequent customer of the name Jino mumbles, and a few hums of agreement sound throughout the small ice cream shop.

**

Man, I just found this sexy ass bitch with a Chinese name. Should I talk to him?
- Jongin

Sehun rolls his eyes as he checks his phone. He’s about to text back with ‘no, of course not’, when Kyungsoo obviously clears his throat and gives him a sideways glare that could only mean ‘if you don’t put that away now, I will call Joonmyeon over here and I will get you fired.’ Sehun hates it when Kyungsoo shares the shift with him, as if they need two people working on at this slow shift, because of the way he looks over his shoulder and raises eyebrows and just really pays attention to things that aren’t his business in the first place.

“I’m surprised you still work here,” Kyungsoo says, not too loudly so that the customers can here across from the room, but loud enough so that Sehun could clearly understand what he had said without asking ‘pardon?’, or more realistically, ‘what?’

“I’m surprised you’re still a virgin with lips like those,” Sehun retaliates, cleaning the dishes because Kyungsoo’s hands seem to be way too pretty for ‘cleaning work’. Sehun doesn’t mind, or well, he wouldn’t mind if the gloves weren’t bright pink, but a previous worker named Key had bought the gloves and the other workers didn’t want to let them die once Key left to bigger and brighter things. Or they just really liked watching people scrub ice cream and juice from plates in a light pink apron and bright pink gloves.

Kyungsoo turns around, appalled that the junior would even dare talk back to him like that. He’s about to open his pretty, little lips and bite back with some lame comeback that had begun in the ‘80s when someone clears their throat and asks, “Um?”

Sehun smiles once he recognizes the sunken-eyed customer from before, who had rudely screamed at him for being a panda-assassin. He pushes Kyungsoo out of the way, throwing the pink dish gloves at him and showing him his biggest smile, whilst readjusting his worker’s cap. The customer furrows his brows at this sudden turn-of-events, and Kyungsoo is swearing underneath his breath from on the floor, but Sehun does a wonderful job of completely and utterly ignoring him.

“Yes? Oh Sehun, at your service!” Truthfully, he is never his perky unless Joonmyeon spills the sad news that they’ll have to eat the rest of the ice cream because the due date is coming up, but today is a special day, and because the customer always looks either a) angry or b) depressed, a little aegyo could certainly go a long way.

The customer glances upwards, behind Sehun, to look at the chalkboard, or better well-known as the menu by some people, and scans the words. Around the time that it takes Sehun to read ‘coffee’, the customer reads only a single letter in Korean.

“Do you sell bubble tea here?” the customer asks after like, at least twenty minutes. Sehun knows that they sell bubble tea, and it’s pretty obvious because on the menu there is a big drawing of it, drawn by the best—Byun Baekhyun when he’s not on his fangirly mode—and it takes over at least 17cm of the length of the 30x30cm board, so he nods as quickly as possible. And then Sehun is shocked.

Because the customer smiles. And it is certainly the most adorable thing that Sehun has ever seen. It’s not aegyo, or whatever Joonmyeon thinks Jongin is doing, but pure and utter adorableness, and Sehun is one-hundred-percent sure that his heart must have skipped a beat—because why the hell would he feel like he needs some air, stat?

“Then I’ll have strawberry, then,” the customer replies, and Sehun nods, running off to go do his order. Once and awhile, he looks over his shoulder, watching the customer play on his phone, scrolling through texts or sites or wherever—and Sehun briefly wonders what the guy is into. Pandas, Sehun thinks—why else would he come in the ice cream parlour and call him a murderer if he didn’t like pandas?

“Thank you.” The customer smiles, and turns to leave—and it’s exactly then when Sehun sees his nametag—as he must have popped in during his break from work. Huang Tao it reads, and Sehun smiles—it’s a pretty name.

“Tao,” Sehun rolls the name in his mouth once the customer has left, and Kyungsoo has magically reappeared, armed with a mop. He nudges him with the mop until Sehun finally decides to go mop up the floors.

**

“Bubble tea, again?” Sehun asks him the next day, when he pops in. Tao looks up from his phone—it’s a Blackberry, but Sehun isn’t one to judge when it comes to electronics, and Tao nods, biting down on his lip. Sehun notices how it shines, it gleams, underneath the lights of the ice cream parlour slash café and wonders if he puts lipstick or lip gloss on them or if they’re naturally that way and what they would possibly taste like—

“Um, what?” Sehun asks, having missed the words that Tao has spoken because of his useless and unprofessional daydream. Tao smirks, and Sehun is pretty much one-hundred-percent sure that there is something on those lips—or those lips just happen to be that kissable.

“Peach,” Tao repeats, “I’d like peach flavoured.”

Sehun has to say—his Korean is flawless for someone from a different country. He closes his eyes as the machine makes it, wondering what kind of make-up he might have used to make such misty and alluring eyes. Certainly some eyeliner, for sure. He opened his eyes once he was done, slipping the contents from the blender into the cup, where the black dots already sat—ready to mingle with the peach.

“Here,” Sehun said with a smile, handing over the bubble tea. Tao smiled back, fishing out his wallet and politely handing over the money necessary. “Oh wait—your change!” Sehun looked up to see Tao already out the door, and a phone up against his ear.

**

“I’d like some patbingsu,” Tao orders. Sehun opens his mouth—because really, he isn’t sure that he can make it, but Tao’s eyes are filled with such worry and something else that Sehun nods. “Strawberry.” Sehun has noticed that the customer seems to like strawberry—he’s ordered strawberry ice cream, strawberry bubble tea—and now patbingsu. He adds it to the things in his head—Tao likes strawberry.

Three phone conversations with Kyungsoo later, Sehun walks up to the table where Tao has sat down. His laptop is open on the table and they have to move it a little bit to sit the plate down. Tao takes a bite, and his whole face lights up—and Sehun’s does the same. He makes a mental note to thank Kyungsoo with taking his shifts the next time he saw him.

He feels awkward, just standing there watching Tao eat the dessert, so he turns away to leave. Cold fingers touch his wrist and Sehun looks down to see the biggest, roundest eyes ever—and it takes him a moment to realize that the eyes are Tao’s, and it’s only because of the eyeliner around them. Sehun adds another thing to the list of things he adores about Huang Tao.

“Please, sit with me,” Tao pleads, and Sehun feels like he’s watching TV at home, with the commercials stating that just a dollar a day will help with everything a child will need—because Tao looks so much like one. And like people who just love peace and harmony wall too much—see Kim Joonmyeon—Sehun sits down and accepts the small price of unhappy customers just to sit next to someone like Huang Tao.

“So, Sehun-sshi.” Sehun’s cheeks redden instantly and he wonders—how the hell does he know my name? Tao starts laughing, filling the parlour with his adorable laughter. “It’s your nametag, silly. And plus, you told it to me yesterday. ‘Oh Sehun, at your service!’” Tao adds in the aegyo, and Sehun is ready to give all his life savings and his first born child to this adorable man.

“You’re adorable,” Sehun says before he can think (because, when you’re around Tao, thinking doesn’t happen that often).

Tao looks up from his patbingsu and smiles, licking his lips to catch some of the strawberry flavor before it dribbles down his chin. “I’ve heard that a lot, actually. I do really cute aegyo in order to get the things that I want from my geges,” he explains, and the last sentence practically screams trouble to Sehun—except for that ‘geges’ part—because he doesn’t know how to speak whatever-that-just-was.

“Your um, geges, must do a lot for you then. You must be really close,” Sehun begins, trying his best to pretend that he’s a little bit comfortable in the comfy chair that he’s sitting in.

Tao shrugs, “They buy me Gucci, and I do aegyo, which is really it sometimes. I’ve been getting further and further away from them lately but they don’t seem to really mind. I’ve been working hard at the hotel to try to get a nice place to live, and they know that I’ll be moving out soon anyways. We met up because we were broke, but we broke up because we finally got enough money.”

“You’re just going to leave them?” Sehun whispers, cocking his head to the side. Tao looks up from his ice cream to watch him—and they lock eyes.

When Sehun finally blinks, he looks down, chewing on his lip. “When I first got this job, I hated everyone that worked here. Baekhyun was always spamming me about girl groups he liked, Chanyeol was always breaking the machines, Joonmyeon never really solved any problems, Kyungsoo nagged you like crazy, and Jongin didn’t do anything and you had to do it yourself. But yet—I really grew to like them, and when Jongin left after a while, I realized that I didn’t want this ‘family’ to be ripped apart.” He laughed, “You know what I’m saying?”

Tao leaned into his chair and hummed. “We were all broke, the six of us. Three of us, Lu Han, Yixing and I, came from China together and we tried to get jobs and the cheapest place available. At the viewing we met Kris, and then Minseok and Jongdae happened to become Lu Han and Yixing’s lovers. And everyone just kind of fit, like a puzzle piece. But slowly, piece by piece, we’ll have to go, right? Six people in a small apartment is tight, really tight. Someone needs air to breathe.”

“Stay as long as you can,” Sehun encourages, leaning and touching Tao’s arm, “And if you ever need someplace to go, if it gets too crowded, you can always come over to my place.” He writes down his address, but Tao swats his hand away, standing up and gathering his things.

“I don’t need some stupid ice cream vendor to tell me how to live my life. I hate it there, so I will be moving soon—I don’t give a damn about what you think.”

He storms out of the ice cream parlour, the patbingsu sitting on the table, half-eaten and neglected.

**

“You should probably just give up on him,” Baekhyun comments, looking up from his compact to watch as Sehun sighs the seventh time that ten minutes (he counted), his head on his palm and his eyes looking at nowhere in particular. “Because that is life. Some super awesome guy appears, claiming that his dragon is so big and he’s so damn tall and so sexy, and then in the end, right before you’re going to have sex, he can’t get it up! Life is just like that.”

“I don’t want to hear about Krissss,” Sehun whines, “I want my Huang Tao panda lover!” It was, of course, right after Tao had stomped out of the parlour and Sehun’s heart had actually snapped in two (he wasn’t joking—Kyungsoo had to carry him home because he wasn’t sure if his heart was beating and he was laying out on the floor like a drunkard and Kyungsoo was pretty certain that it wasn’t sanitary for him to do that), and he had realized the utter power of love.

For he was sure that he was in love.

“Come on, make me some bubble tea or something,” Baekhyun ordered, kicking one of Sehun’s calves. Sehun sinks to the floor, clutching his face, because Tao loved bubble tea. He makes clear of this by wailing it throughout the ice cream shop, and Baekhyun is regretting spending his only day off with someone that doesn’t even appreciate it. He could be spending time going through all of his Girl’s Generation albums.

“My life is ruined,” Sehun mumbles, staring at his shoes, a small pout appearing at his lips. Baekhyun sighs—patting Sehun’s head and cooing.

“Call me when your life is back to normal, k? I preferred love-sick Sehun over heart-broken Sehun. You know, Kris told me about some guy that he was friends with, this guy called Lu Han; you two could probably hit it off. He can buy you bubble tea or something.” Sehun glares at Baekhyun, who simply shrugs and leaves melodramatic teenager to his own drama.

“Sehun,” a voice calls, and Sehun grumbles, “Go away.”

“Sehun,” he repeats, and Sehun finally looks up—only to see Tao leaning over the counter, looking at him with wide, worrying eyes. “Are you ok? You don’t seem like the unprofessional typ-”

Tao doesn’t have enough time to finish his statement because Sehun bounds up and wraps him up into a hug. Tao’s eyes widen and he stutters out complete nonsense, but it’s drowned out by Sehun’s girly squeal and “Oh my god, I didn’t think that you would be back! I’m so happy that you’re back, I missed you so much! Like, my heart was broken when you walked away.”

(Ignore the fact that he sounds like a teenage pop song)

Sehun pulls away, tears forming at his eyelids, and Tao smiles.

“Strawberry ice cream,” Tao orders, and Sehun scoops it cheerily. “And make an apple bubble tea, too.” Sehun nods, rushing around behind the counter, finding the ingredients and making a delicious-looking bubble tea.

Tao grabs Sehun’s hand, dragging him over the counter and out the door. Chanyeol is in charge now, and Sehun isn’t one-hundred-percent ok with that, but Tao doesn’t seem to mind—sitting down on the curb and starting to lick his ice cream, the pink lines running down his fingers.

“You words stuck in here,” Tao points to his head and Sehun half-wishes that it was his heart, but it’s the thought that counts, right? “And I decided to stay with them as long as I possibly could. I didn’t want to—but I wanted to see how long it would take me. Slowly, I realized how much I liked the guys. They’re funny and sweet.” Tao smiles bitterly. “Thanks.”

“Are you still going to move out?” Sehun asks, watching Tao shrug and look up to the sky.

“I was thinking of staying at your place, actually,” Tao chuckles. “I’ve gotten most of my stuff packed anyways, and we’ve decided that we’re going to all move out together, as a family. And you did say that I could come over, whenever I needed to…”

Sehun jumps up, “Yes! You can come over whenever you like!” Tao smiles, bringing Sehun back down onto the ground.

“Oh, and the bubble tea is for you, by the way.”

Sehun raises his eyebrows, “How did you know that it was my favorite flavour?”

Tao shrugs, starting to count the cars that go by. “You think I really came in because I thought you guys were panda killers?”

Sehun blinks and Tao smirks.

“Actually—yes.”

Tao laughs, leaning in and softly taking Sehun’s chin in his hand, “Nah.”

He bridges the gap.

--
end.
a/n: thank you to everyone that dealt with me. I still have no knowledge when it comes to writing either Tao or Sehun, so this was.. fun. lol. And don't be a panda killer!
a/n1: nice baekfan in there, jules. i suck sometimes.

stilled photograph {tao/kai}

mywookness — Thu, 13 Sep 2012 23:52:16 GMT

stilled photograph
tao/kai
supernatural!au ; r
violence, coarse language
written as entry 17 in sncj_reversebb's 2012 reverse big bang. art: here

He can kill me, Kai thinks, feeling the coolness of the blade that presses to his neck and the heaviness of the hilt that’s against his heart. It’s a sickening feeling, really, to think that he’s been bested, that someone has finally gotten past him and tricked him. He’s never fed into lies, he’s never trusted anyone—he’s been trained to love no one and to work on logic, not instinct.

And now, foolishly he may add, he has done the complete opposite of what he was supposed to do. He bites down on his lip, feeling the harsh burn of the knife.

It’s even more painful because he isn’t doing anything. He is just keeping it there, waiting for Kai to snap. He wants a show, he’s paid his admission fee in full—he’s been paying since the beginning. He knows how hard it is even to breathe, and in the misty fog, it’s hard to see. The only thing Kai can see is the spots at the corner of his eyes and the knives.

And his hand—Zitao’s hand.

No—Tao’s hand.

He’s a complete different person. And it wasn’t just because he changed his name, like all the players in this game eventually do. Kai had changed his name, too, but he couldn’t remember his real name, nor could he remember Xiumin’s or Suho’s, but for some strange reason, he was always able to remember Tao’s real name.

Maybe because Tao has always been different.

**

“Kai-sshi!” a shrill voice calls, and Kai turns away from his spot near the pond to stare at the ravenette that charges over at him.

Kai has a good memory, even for a five-year-old, so he knows that he has never met this guy before. But the guy knows his name—and that makes Kai tense up. Max, their instructor, has told them that if your opponent knows your name and you don’t know his, your opponent is one step higher than you, he is superior. It is imperative that you know everything about your opponent before you face him.

“I hear you can teleport.” The boy’s eyes are big and round and filled with something that Kai has never seen before. And he’s doing something weird with his lips—too. Suho-hyung has talked about how, when some people are happy, which is by far the stupidest emotion according to instructor Kangin, they turn their lips up, and this is called a smile. Kai decides that this boy is smiling, therefore he is happy—therefore he is foolish.

Kai nods and hums, “Just a little bit for right now—but soon, Max-sunbae says that I will be able to go anyplace in the world. It’s fun and it makes me feel strong and powerful.” He sits down on a rock adjacent to the pond, watching the koi fish swish back and forth, and their orange-and-white hides glowing in the sun.

The boy sits down on the grass beside him, his bare feet inches from being swept away by the cool pond’s waters. “You must be lucky. A lot of us don’t know our powers, yet.” Kai looks down—maybe that’s why he has never seen him before. Kai remembers spending hours locked up, trying his best to harness the feeling that grew from the pit of his stomach and spread out to his fingertips—all the while, Max watching him.

It wasn’t until he was finally able to jump from one place to another did Max’s eyes open fully and he opened the door to the outside. It smelled like freedom and flowers, and Kai tried to spend as many hours outside as possible, adventuring. He would eventually go back inside the house, and train and help Max and Kangin make dinner, of course.

“You’ll find it soon, I promise,” Kai says, patting the boy’s head. He’s about to stand up, for the sunset appears behind the clouds and Suho will need help cleaning, when the boy touches his ankle and smiles.

“I’m Zitao,” he introduces, “Pleased to meet you.”

**

It’s surprising that the young boy that had given him such a beautiful smile and charming attitude at the age of six was the same one that was currently trying to cut his head off fourteen years later at twenty. Kai balls his fists—he’s weaponless. He never had needed a weapon, because he was always able to teleport away. He was never trapped and escape was easy.

This is different. Even if he tried jumping away, in the point three seconds it takes him to disappear in the smoke, it is possible that Tao could cut his throat, kill him, so when he appeared at where he wanted to go, his head would roll onto the floor and his body would crumple. Tao has studied him, read him like a book, learned his weaknesses and his strengths, and Kai is foolish. So damn foolish.

Tao leans in so that their cheeks brush. Kai looks from the corner of his eye. Tao’s hair is still as dark as ebony and his eyes are still as puzzling as the dark side of the moon, with his hands pale and clammy compared to Kai’s dark complexion. Tao shines in the fog, his skin glistening like stones on the beach at night, even with the large cut on his left cheek.

“Are you thinking about me?” Tao asks, his hot breath tickling Kai’s ear and he flinches. “No, you don’t want to move.” He presses the knife even close to Kai’s Adam’s apple and he’s surprised that he isn’t drawing blood just yet. Tao smiles, kissing behind Kai’s ear. “That’s great. I want you to think about me. I want my name to be the last thing on your mind.”

“How?” Kai asks, his voice dry from the dehydration of surviving in the fog for so long. Tao smirks, pressing his second knife closer to Kai’s heart, the hilt so heavy, even if Kai isn’t holding it up.

“I found my power after I was exiled,” he explains, “Just like you said. I would eventually find my power. And thank you for being such a nice test dummy to what I’m able to do.” His cheek is cold, like the blade to his neck. “To catch you is like catching a hummingbird. I’m surprised I was able to get you so easily.”

Tao chuckles. “I can stop time. And I knew you would be the one that they would send to kill me. To get rid of the problem.”

**

“Fight me,” Zitao asks when Kai is practicing his fencing by himself. It’s one of those things that Max has always tried to get him interested in, even if the younger has always complained that he could just jump and he wouldn’t have to know how to fence. But Kai is a fighter, and like the rest of them, he needs to know how to use at least three weapons. Swords have always been easier.

Eight-year-old Zitao looks tired, especially for someone his age, and Kai wonders how many nights has he spent awake, looking up at the ceiling, wondering. Out of the twelve kids that had arrived to train under Kangin and Max’s teachings, Zitao was the last one to still have not discovered his power. He knew this from how Xiumin would always put pity on him during practices or when an angry Kangin would scream at him for being lazy and useless.

“I didn’t know you fenced.” Zitao looks up from his sword to glare at Kai. He looks so much older for someone just a year older than him. But everyone has hardened here. This ‘happiness’ that used to radiate from Zitao has dwindled and dissipated, so much that he couldn’t even remember the last time he had smiled.

“Don’t call it fencing. Someone’s gonna die,” Zitao bites back, lifting up his sword so it’s level to Kai’s neck. Kai nods, he guesses that some people really just don’t enjoy jokes or something. Jokes—Suho told him that it was when someone tried lifting another person’s spirits by saying something foolish. Kai had thought that Zitao would enjoy this ‘joke’, but it had seemed like he didn’t like these ones.

“This is practice, though,” Kai says, bending at the waist, and Zitao copies the motion. When they stand back up straight, they level their swords. Zitao smirks, but doesn’t reply, and that doesn’t help the sickening feeling in Kai’s stomach at all.

Zitao lunges and Kai dodges effortlessly. He takes a step closer, doing another block, before cutting Zitao’s pants. Zitao growls, leaning forward and cutting Kai’s cheek. It burns, and Kai grinds his teeth, stepping to the right and tripping Zitao with his left foot, stepping onto his chest with his right. Slowly, he pants, dropping his sword so that it is at Zitao’s chin.

“Get off of me,” Zitao growls.

“I was making a point,” Kai bites back, “Practice your defense. You can fight, fight and fight some more, but if you have no defense, the things that you love the most will be ruined and killed.” Kai steps off of him, throwing his sword down onto the dirty ground, biting down hard on his lip as he leaves.

**

“Defense,” Kai growls, and Tao laughs into his ear, turning his head so that their heads are together—so that they’re so close that they could be one. Kai lifts his hand up and rubs Tao’s hand, running his fingers down to the cool feel of the blade, the one that cuts at the sensitive area of his neck, and purposely he cuts his finger.

Tao grabs his finger and sucks at the blood—Kai hisses. Tao dips his tongue into the cut and a thousand chills run through Kai’s body. “Yes, defense. What did you say, that day? ‘You can fight, fight and fight some more, but if you have no defense, the things that you love the most will be ruined and killed?” Tao laughs, biting down on Kai’s finger.

Tao lets the other sword drop to the floor of the fogged room. “I’m almost tempted to spin you around right now, and just strike you through the heart. Would you like that? You have always been one for quick things, quick fixes, and happy endings. Well, Kai-ah, whatever Suho-hyung has told you about fairy tales and happiness is wrong and fake, we as a people just live to stay alive and nothing more.”

“And to think that you were always the one smiling,” Kai says, as Tao lets off on the sword against his neck. He’s surprised that he doesn’t push it up, next to his neck again, and just sighs, looking out into the distance. The fog that surrounds them reminds Kai of the wisps of black that he leaves each time that he teleports, leaving the people in a daze as thick as the cloud of smoke.

Tao still doesn’t seem to like jokes, then.

He spins Kai around, and that’s the time that Kai teleports away. He’s shaken, and he knows that he can never teleport very far when he isn’t in tip-top performance, so he only gets a few meters away. Tao’s eyes burn hate and Kai pants, hands on his knees, glaring back at him.

“Let’s end this. The fighters want you dead, and you want me dead. We’ll fight to the death, Zitao.” At his real name, something flashes in Tao’s eyes, before he straightens up and nods.

“Fine, to the death.”

**

“Suho,” Kai asks, nudging the elder. He turns and smiles at Kai.

“What is it, Kai-ah?” he replies, smiling in hopes of making Kai’s worried-filled face disappear and be replaced by a happier feeling. Even if Max doesn’t like smiling that much, he can’t deny Suho’s addictive smile, so elder was used to smiling—and that always brightened up the room, compared to the scowl that Kris always had on.

“Tao,” Kai says—biting down on his tongue to make sure not to say his real name, “Max took him from his room this morning. Do you know what happened to him?”

Suho is confused for a second, before looking down at the dirty ground and rubbing his arm anxiously. Twelve-year-old Kai is curious, and Max is always reprimanding him for his curiosity, so much that he has been sent to the punishment room so many times this week. It’s cold and it’s only Luhan and him that ever end up there lately.

He knows now that Suho knows information—it’s him and Lay that know things, but Lay didn’t seem to know what had happened to Tao. So Suho was the next person to ask.

“You know that he hasn’t found his power yet,” fifteen-year-old Suho says, and Kai nods, “And Max is getting really pissed at him. He’s great at fighting, but without his power…” Suho exhales and Kai watches as he reaches into his jeans and lights up a cigarette, putting it to his lips. Max doesn’t like things like cigarettes or alcohol in the camp, but Max smokes himself, and Kangin has soju in his room.

“I think that Max has finally give up on him,” Suho says, and when he talks, the gray smoke that leaves his lips reminds him of his own smoke—the one that he saw from one side of the room when he first teleported, those many years ago. “Poor Tao-ah, he’s such a good kid, too. He works a lot more than the rest of us.”

“But we have our powers,” Kai reminds him, and Suho sighs.

“Yeah.”

**

“Kai-ah,” Max calls, and he turns, to see his instructor holding Tao by the scruff of his neck. “I want you to teleport as far as you possibly can, drop him, and leave him there. Come back as soon as you possibly can. If you need help, just call me and I’ll find you.”

Max turns and walks away, and Kai stands there in the field, right next to pond—where they met so many years ago. Thirteen-year-old Zitao looks rough, like his spirits have been crushed. He looks so deflated and Kai wants to smile, to tell him that he’ll bring him to his parent’s house and to just say the address—but Zitao is Chinese, not Korean, and so Kai won’t know the area.

“Let’s go,” Kai says, grabbing Zitao’s hand. He sighs and nods.

They’re transported to the East Sea, where Kai remembers being dropped off by his parents, those many years ago, when Max notified his family that he was a born fighter, a mutant, and he would be best in his care. Zitao looks around, before walking to the right, and with pants on, he wades into the water, letting the cold waves lick at his calves.

“Are you leaving me here?” Zitao asks, turning around to stare at Kai.

“Max-sunbae says so.”

Zitao sighs, kicking the water. Suho would love it here—Xiumin, too. They would love using their powers—and maybe Kris and Chanyeol could open their wings and let their phoenix and dragon fly through the air and mingle, their godly bodies reflecting in the water.

“I have a power, right? If I find my power, I’ll be allowed to be brought back in, right?” Zitao asks, and Kai sighs—because he can never give him a clear answer. He seems to understand this, for he sits down in the waves, letting the sun hit his pale face.

“Kai,” he calls as he’s about to leave, and Kai hums. “If we ever meet again, I’d like to think that we’re not facing each other, killing each other.”

“I hope so too, Zitao-hyung.” Zitao seems to like this, for he smiles brightly, and Kai thinks that he has never looked more beautiful.

**

“Kai,” Max asks nineteen-year-old Kai when he’s training with Sehun and Lay. The two nod and disappear, headed off somewhere else, even if Kai hates being all alone with Max, because he’s cold, he’s strong, and he’s so much more powerful than Kai is. Baekhyun was his apprentice, but with one annoyed instructor, he had ended up blinding him, and now Baekhyun had the power of light, but was never able to see the beauty he could create.

“Yes, Max-sunbae?” Max smiles, wrapping his arm around Kai’s shoulders and he feels terrible—so self-conscious.

“It’s Tao. He’s managed to kill some of my fighters, and I want him gone. You’re the ace of the eleven. I’ve tracked him down and all you have to do is kill him.” Kai realizes that he says eleven instead of twelve.

“I don’t want to.”

Max slaps him, his hand lighting up with his blinding light. “I will rip a hole in you if you ever dare disobey me again, Jongin!”

And Kai disappears.

**

Tao lunges forward and Kai leans back, dodging him. He runs and grabs a sword from the floor and points it at him, and when it reaches his chin, cutting just a little bit of his skin, Kai sees something.

It’s the same expression from before. It’s the same child—it’s always been Zitao. It has never been Tao, someone that is vengeful and has worked so hard to kill the people that have exiled him. It has always been Zitao, a hard-working boy that only wanted to be accepted, only wanted to be someone that someone could look up to.

So Kai drops his sword and falls to his knees. “Kill me.”

Zitao blinks, looking down at Kai for the first time—noticing his full lips, but also the bruises on his skin that he has never seen before. He has never seen the cuts or the scars that run down his arms—and it hits him. Zitao has never been the only one that has been working since the beginning. Kai has also been working. Kai has also worked hard.

He drops to his knees in front of him and pulls his chin up, pressing their lips together. “Let’s run away.”

“That’s stupid, there are no happy endings like that,” Kai says.

Zitao smiles, running his hand down Kai’s neck. “I’ll take my chances. As long as you are able to run, I’ll love you, and protect you.”

So Kai says yes.

--
end.
a/n: thank you for all the people that told me, "you have to finish this!" and didn't bug me when i was writing this. thank you so much. and thank you artist-sshi and the commentors!
a/n1: fluffy stuff aside, i hope you liked this!

r.i.p {junsu/chansung}

mywookness — Sun, 09 Sep 2012 22:34:58 GMT

r.i.p
junsu/chansung
post-apocalyptic au, angst ; r
incest, abuse, substance abuse
written for the prompt, "Family quarrels are bitter things. They don't go according to any rules. They're not like aches or wounds, they're more like splits in the skin that won't heal because there's not enough material - F. Scott Fitzgerald" at seoulfulness

“is everything ok?” eleven-year old chansung asks, grasping onto his brother’s hand, the gaps in between their fingers caked with mud and dust. his feet hurt from walking for two days straight, but he doesn’t want to complain. he doesn’t want to be annoying. his brother’s face already looks twisted and hardened, unlike the smiley and upbeat personality that he had always seen from him.

“yes,” junsu replies, taking another step. on his back, he carries a small bag that contains “all we will need for where we’re going”. chansung remembers seeing the money jar being broken, and separated from the broken glass, the contents filled up the bottom of the bag, forcing junsu to look through his bag for minutes on end to find out what he was looking for. there are also four t-shirts; two for junsu and two for chansung. they’ve cut the pants of their jeans, and now walk in their shorts.

“what about nickhun-hyung? what about our brothers back home?” chansung continues, making sure that his grasp on his brother’s hand is enough; that they cannot be separated by the strongest of forces. in the last few months, he has found himself even closer to him, even closer than junho, who he had thought had been his favourite brother for a very long time, now.

junsu sighs, looking up into the cloudless sky. “nickhun has done some bad things, chansung-ah, things that have broken up our family. i didn’t want you to be raised in a broken family.”

“what bad things? how is it so bad that our family is broken up? you can’t break up a family, can you hyung?” he sees junsu bite his cheek. junsu has been very quiet these days, chansung remembers. when nickhun and taecyeon yell at each other, or when wooyoung cries silently in the corner, or when junho ran away to cousin kwon’s place, the footsteps the only sound coming through the cracks of chansung’s bedroom door because everyone had disappeared, leaving the two youngest home, he was silent.

junsu sighs, “he has brought evil. you see, when jaebeom left, we were having a rocky time, remember?” chansung nods. he remembers their father pointing to the door and jaebeom walking through and never coming back, when kwon and his brothers had still lived in their house, before their sisters refused to come back home with their mother. chansung remembers cousin kwon crying for days, before gathering changmin, jinwoon and seulong, and finding a new place to live. he remembers their sisters being dragged away by their mother.

until it was the six brothers in the house, and a troubled father that clutched on the dream that his family, his big, grand family that he had brought together, could possibly work. but they were too different—no; they were too human, chansung decides.

“the rocky memories must have come back. people keep trying to find scapegoats, and so, you hope that you get another life, another chance, but some people won’t let you. that’s why taecyeon kept on screaming at him, because he wasn’t smartening up,” junsu continues, his voice melancholy, and chansung wants to squeeze his hand, but junsu burnt his palm yesterday when trying to make a fire, and it would probably hurt him.

“i told junho to leave,” junsu admits, and chansung’s eyes widen drastically at the knowledge. but it isn’t that much of a surprise—junsu had always been very defensive over junho, so much that junho stuck to him by instinct whenever taecyeon got mad, or when nickhun came home drunk, or when wooyoung was nowhere to be found, but chansung knew he was in the bathroom, hoping for a better ending. “and when he left, i knew that you were sad, and i knew i needed to be there for you.”

“why did you take me, then?” chansung asks, watching the sun dip behind the mountains ahead.

he hadn’t thought that they were so far away from life, but maybe since the big blackout, things might have been different, or maybe places that used to exist didn’t exist anymore. seoul could be so far away, or they could have passed it already—the ruins of a climbing society nowhere to be seen any longer since the demise of the world.

junsu stops walking, turning to face his little brother. with his free hand, he smiles, cupping chansung’s face. he leans in and kisses him on the forehead, holding chansung’s chin in place. “i love you, and i don’t want you to get hurt. that’s why.”

chansung blinks, looking down at the rocky earth beneath their feet, dry and cracked from the lack of rain. junsu made the meals, he helped his brothers with illnesses or wounds, he sometimes cleaned, and he kept track of the whole family. the very fabric since the family slowly fell apart. and he sacrificed the rest of the family for him—chansung.

it’s heavy on his chest and he closes his eyes, daring to dream that if he opened them, he might end up waking up from this broken, life-like dream.

“let’s continue,” junsu says, and chansung has to slip back in.

--
end.
a/n: prompt brought me in. i have a thing for umma!junsu so i wrote this, even if all i know from 2pm is a few shows where they're with 2am 'cause of my 2am babies.
a/n1: and 'father' is jyp, btw. out of all of the papas of companies, i love jyp the most.
a/n2: enjoyed? good!